WO2015107827A1 - Program reception apparatus, program reception method, and recording medium - Google Patents

Program reception apparatus, program reception method, and recording medium Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2015107827A1
WO2015107827A1 PCT/JP2014/083367 JP2014083367W WO2015107827A1 WO 2015107827 A1 WO2015107827 A1 WO 2015107827A1 JP 2014083367 W JP2014083367 W JP 2014083367W WO 2015107827 A1 WO2015107827 A1 WO 2015107827A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
information
program
point
output
acquisition unit
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2014/083367
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
角谷　和俊
Original Assignee
公立大学法人兵庫県立大学
株式会社ミックウェア
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 公立大学法人兵庫県立大学, 株式会社ミックウェア filed Critical 公立大学法人兵庫県立大学
Publication of WO2015107827A1 publication Critical patent/WO2015107827A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/43—Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
    • H04N21/431—Generation of visual interfaces for content selection or interaction; Content or additional data rendering
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/41—Structure of client; Structure of client peripherals
    • H04N21/4104—Peripherals receiving signals from specially adapted client devices
    • H04N21/4126—The peripheral being portable, e.g. PDAs or mobile phones
    • H04N21/41265—The peripheral being portable, e.g. PDAs or mobile phones having a remote control device for bidirectional communication between the remote control device and client device
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/47—End-user applications
    • H04N21/472—End-user interface for requesting content, additional data or services; End-user interface for interacting with content, e.g. for content reservation or setting reminders, for requesting event notification, for manipulating displayed content
    • H04N21/4722—End-user interface for requesting content, additional data or services; End-user interface for interacting with content, e.g. for content reservation or setting reminders, for requesting event notification, for manipulating displayed content for requesting additional data associated with the content

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a program receiving apparatus for processing information related to a program.
  • Such digital broadcast television has a technology in which location information is embedded in a program, the location information is transmitted to a map server by a remote control operation of the television, and the map server selects a corresponding map and returns it to the television.
  • Such digital broadcasting television has a technology for installing a map-specific channel, searching for a map using a television remote control device, and building a map site that can be easily enlarged or reduced.
  • the program auxiliary information cannot be output to a device different from the device that outputs the program.
  • the information processing apparatus is information related to a program being output, and includes a program related information receiving unit that receives program related information including one or more key information, and a program related information receiving unit A key information acquisition unit that acquires one or more key information that is a term belonging to a predetermined category from the received program related information, and information corresponding to the key information acquired by the key information acquisition unit, It is an information processing apparatus provided with the program supplementary information acquisition part which acquires the program supplementary information which is the information which supplements the content of this, and the program supplementary information output part which outputs the program supplementary information which the program supplementary information acquisition part acquired.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit can acquire two or more types of program auxiliary information
  • the program auxiliary information output unit has two or more types of information. This is an information processing apparatus that outputs one or more types of program auxiliary information among the program auxiliary information.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit acquires different types of program auxiliary information according to the relationship between two or more key information. Device.
  • two or more types of program auxiliary information have a priority of output with respect to the second invention
  • the program auxiliary information output unit includes one type of program auxiliary information. Is an information processing apparatus that outputs other types of program supplementary information when it cannot be output.
  • the key information is point information that is a term belonging to the point category
  • the program auxiliary information is related to the point.
  • This is an information processing apparatus including point-related information that is information.
  • the program supplementary information acquisition unit is a spatial indicator that indicates a spatial relationship between two or more pieces of point information acquired by the key information acquisition unit.
  • This is an information processing apparatus that acquires relationship information and continuously acquires two or more pieces of program auxiliary information using spatial relationship information.
  • the information processing apparatus further comprises a scene determination unit for determining a scene change in the program with respect to the sixth invention, and the program auxiliary information output unit is determined by the scene determination unit.
  • This is an information processing apparatus that does not continuously output program auxiliary information when scenes are switched.
  • the point related information is one type of a point photo, a point street view, and a point map information.
  • An information processing apparatus including the above information.
  • the point-related information includes a street view of the point, and two or more types of program auxiliary information have an output priority order.
  • the information output unit outputs another type of program auxiliary information corresponding to the key information acquired by the key information acquisition unit when the street view corresponding to the key information acquired by the key information acquisition unit cannot be output. It is.
  • the information processing apparatus further includes a program type acquisition unit that acquires the type of program, as compared with any of the first to ninth aspects, and the program auxiliary information output unit includes Accordingly, the information processing apparatus changes the type of the program auxiliary information to be output or changes the output mode of the program auxiliary information.
  • the key information acquisition unit includes two or more keys from the program related information received by the program related information receiving unit. It further includes a moving means information acquiring unit that acquires information and acquires moving means information indicating the type of moving means used in the program using two or more key information, and the program auxiliary information output unit includes: This is an information processing apparatus that changes the output mode of program auxiliary information according to moving means information.
  • the key information is personal name information that belongs to a personal name category
  • the program auxiliary information is It is an information processing apparatus containing the person relevant information which is the information regarding.
  • the information processing apparatus is the program receiving unit for receiving a program and the program output unit for outputting the program received by the program receiving unit, according to any of the first to twelfth aspects of the invention.
  • the program auxiliary information output unit is an information processing apparatus that outputs the program auxiliary information together with the program.
  • the information processing apparatus is an apparatus different from the program output apparatus that outputs a program with respect to any of the first to twelfth aspects of the invention.
  • An information processing apparatus further comprising a channel number acquisition unit to acquire, wherein the key information acquisition unit acquires one or more key information that is a term belonging to a predetermined category from program-related information corresponding to the channel number It is.
  • the information processing apparatus of the fifteenth aspect of the invention is directed to the fourteenth aspect of the invention according to an instruction receiving unit that receives an instruction for controlling the program output device, and an instruction received by the instruction receiving unit,
  • a control signal transmission unit that transmits a control signal to the program output device, the instruction includes a channel change instruction, and the channel number acquisition unit is a channel number corresponding to the channel change instruction received by the instruction reception unit Is an information processing apparatus for acquiring
  • the program receiving apparatus of the sixteenth aspect of the invention is a program receiving unit for receiving a program, and a program receiving unit for receiving program related information that is information related to the program and includes one or more pieces of point information.
  • a program output unit for outputting a program received by the program receiving unit, a point information acquiring unit for acquiring one or more point information from the program related information received by the program related information receiving unit, and a point information acquiring unit Is information corresponding to the acquired point information, and is information related to the point information, one or more types of point related information acquisition unit for acquiring the point related information and one or more types acquired by the point related information acquisition unit
  • the program receiving apparatus relates to the sixteenth aspect, in which the point-related information acquisition unit uses two or more point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit.
  • the program receiving device that continuously acquires related information, and the point related information output unit outputs the movement of the point related information by outputting two or more point related information acquired continuously by the point related information acquisition unit. It is.
  • the point-related information acquisition unit indicates a spatial relationship between two or more pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit.
  • a method for acquiring spatial relation information, continuously acquiring two or more spot related information using the spatial relation information, and acquiring two or more spot related information according to the acquired spatial relation information are different program receiving apparatuses.
  • the program receiving device of the nineteenth invention is a program receiving device in which one or more kinds of point related information includes a street view, in contrast to any of the sixteenth to eighteenth inventions.
  • the program receiving apparatus is the program receiving apparatus according to the nineteenth aspect, wherein the point-related information acquiring unit uses at least one point using the two or more point information acquired by the point information acquiring unit.
  • This is a program receiving apparatus that acquires position information indicating the position of information and direction information regarding a direction between two or more pieces of point information, and acquires a street view using the position information and the direction information.
  • the point-related information acquisition unit acquires the camera image of the position information using the position information, and uses the direction information.
  • the program receiving device acquires a street view corresponding to the direction indicated by the direction information from the acquired camera image.
  • the one or more types of point related information includes street view
  • the output unit is a program receiving device that outputs a street view in a mode in which two or more points indicated by two or more point information are moved using spatial relationship information.
  • the program receiving apparatus is a program receiving apparatus according to any of the sixteenth to twenty-second inventions, wherein the one or more types of point related information includes map information. is there.
  • the program receiving apparatus relates to the twenty-third aspect of the invention, wherein the point-related information acquisition unit is a spatial relationship between two or more pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit.
  • the spatial relation information is obtained
  • the map information corresponding to the spatial relation information is obtained
  • the point related information output unit is a program receiving device that outputs the map information in a different manner according to the spatial relation information. is there.
  • the program receiving apparatus relates to the twenty-fourth aspect, wherein the point-related information output unit is two pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit, The map information corresponding to the first point information is output according to the spatial relationship information between the information and the second point information received after the first point information, and then corresponds to the second point information. It is a program receiver which outputs 2nd point information in the aspect which zooms in or out on map information.
  • the point-related information output unit is two pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquiring unit, as compared with the 25th invention, and the first point Map information including the point indicated by the first point information and the point indicated by the second point information according to the spatial relationship information between the information and the second point information received after the first point information.
  • This is a program receiving device to output.
  • the information processing apparatus can appropriately output program auxiliary information for assisting a program being output.
  • Block diagram of program receiving apparatus 1 in the first embodiment A flowchart for explaining the operation of the program receiving apparatus 1 Figure showing the same output control table Figure showing the same output example Figure showing the same output example Block diagram of information processing apparatus 2 according to Embodiment 2
  • a flowchart for explaining the operation of the information processing apparatus 2 The flowchart explaining the acquisition process of the program auxiliary information
  • the flowchart explaining the output processing of the program auxiliary information The figure which shows the movement means decision management table Figure showing the same output control table
  • the figure which shows the outline of the operation in the specific example Diagram showing an example of the same screen transition Block diagram of information processing apparatus 3 according to Embodiment 3 A flowchart for explaining the operation of the information processing apparatus 3 Conceptual diagram of information processing system 3 in Embodiment 4 Block diagram of the information processing system 3
  • a program is received, information including point information that is information on a point appearing in the program is received, one or more types of point-related information are acquired using the point information, and the program and the point A program receiving apparatus that outputs related information together will be described.
  • the point-related information here is, for example, a street view, map information, or a list of point information.
  • the spatial relationship information indicating the spatial relationship between the areas indicated by the two or more point information, or the temporal relationship information and the spatial relationship information regarding the time of appearance of the two or more point information.
  • a program receiving apparatus that acquires one or more types of point-related information and outputs both the program and the point-related information will be described.
  • FIG. 1 is a block diagram of a program receiving apparatus 1 in the present embodiment.
  • the program receiving device 1 includes a map information storage unit 10, a spot related information storage unit 11, a receiving unit 12, a program receiving unit 13, a program related information receiving unit 14, a program output unit 15, a spot information acquiring unit 16, and a spot related information acquiring.
  • the point related information acquisition unit 17 includes a street view acquisition unit 171 and a map information acquisition unit 172.
  • the point related information output unit 18 includes a street view output unit 181, a map information output unit 182, and a point information output unit 183.
  • the program receiving device 1 is a so-called television device, a smartphone having a program receiving function, a personal computer having a program receiving function, a navigation terminal having a program receiving function, etc., and the type of the device is not limited.
  • the map information storage part 10 which comprises the program receiver 1 can store map information.
  • the map information is map information.
  • the map information usually has one or more pieces of point information indicating points.
  • Point information is information that identifies the location of a region or point on the map (for example, place name, prefecture name, city name, address, building name, landmark name, station name, road name, store name, shopping street name, etc. ).
  • the point information is usually a character string indicating the point, and is, for example, a place name or a name of a scenic spot. However, the point information may be a code number or the like.
  • the point information is preferably a place name or the like written on the map.
  • the map information usually has map symbol information that is a map image.
  • the map symbol information is, for example, bitmap data (raster data) or vector data constituting the map, or a combination thereof.
  • the file format of the map symbol information is not limited to the GIF format, JPEG format, PNG format, or the like.
  • the map information may be an ISO kiwi map data format.
  • the data structure of map information is not ask
  • the map information may have point information, a coordinate group indicating an area indicated by the point information, and coordinates indicating a point indicated by the point information in association with each other.
  • the map information may be managed in association with the scale of the map, for example. Specifically, the map information has information on the scale value of the map output by the map information. Further, the map information may be prepared for each scale. Moreover, you may have several map symbol information from which the map information and the reduced scale about one area
  • the scale of the map here may be considered as information indicating the value of the scale of the map.
  • the map information may have road information.
  • the road information is information regarding the road indicated by the map.
  • the map information may include so-called link data, node data, and the like.
  • the map information may have other information.
  • the spot related information storage unit 11 can store one or more spot related information.
  • the spot related information storage unit 11 may store one or more spot related information identifiers for specifying spot related information.
  • the spot related information storage unit 11 can usually store spot related information or a spot related information identifier in association with the spot information.
  • the point-related information identifier is information on a link to the point-related information, point information, or the like. Details of the spot related information will be described later.
  • the spot related information stored in the spot related information storage unit 11 is usually the spot related information acquired by the spot related information acquisition unit 17. It can be said that the location-related information is information that supports viewing of the program. Further, it can be said that the spot related information is information supplementing the program.
  • the accepting unit 12 accepts instructions and information from the user.
  • the instruction is, for example, an instruction for the output point information.
  • the spot related information corresponding to this instruction is output.
  • An instruction or information input means may be anything such as a remote control, a keyboard, a mouse, a touch panel, and a menu screen.
  • the receiving unit 12 can be realized by a device driver for input means such as a remote controller or a keyboard, control software for a menu screen, or the like.
  • the program receiving unit 13 receives a program.
  • the program is usually a television program.
  • the program receiving unit 13 normally receives a program broadcast from a broadcast device (not shown). However, the program receiving unit 13 may receive a program transmitted via the Internet. Note that a program usually includes a moving image and sound, but may include only a moving image.
  • the program related information receiving unit 14 is information related to a program, and receives program related information including one or more point information.
  • the program related information is usually text information of text multiplex broadcasting.
  • the program related information may be, for example, an electronic program guide, a web page for introducing a program on the Internet, or the like.
  • reception is reception of program related information that is usually synchronized with a program.
  • the program output unit 15 outputs the program received by the program receiving unit 13.
  • output is usually display and sound output on a display, projection and sound output using a projector, but storage in a recording medium, delivery of processing results to other processing devices or other programs, etc. It is a concept that includes
  • the point information acquisition unit 16 acquires one or more pieces of point information from the program related information received by the program related information receiving unit 14.
  • the spot information acquisition unit 16 acquires, for example, one or more spot information from the program related information using the spot information included in the map information of the map information storage unit 10. That is, the spot information acquisition unit 16 acquires, for example, a noun or noun phrase included in the program-related information and matches a spot information included in the map information.
  • maintains the point dictionary which is a collection of point information, for example, and may acquire point information using the said point dictionary. That is, the spot information acquisition unit 16 acquires, for example, a noun or noun phrase included in the program-related information and matches the spot information stored in the spot dictionary.
  • the spot information acquisition unit 16 may acquire a noun or a noun phrase indicating the spot by, for example, morphological analysis of the program related information.
  • morphological analysis is a well-known technique, detailed description is abbreviate
  • the point-related information acquisition unit 17 acquires one or more types of point-related information using the one or more point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit 16.
  • the spot related information is information corresponding to the spot information acquired by the spot information acquisition unit 16 and is information related to the spot information.
  • the spot related information is, for example, street view, map information, a set of spot information, a photograph related to the spot, and the like.
  • the spot related information acquisition unit 17 acquires the spot related information using two or more pieces of spot information acquired by the spot information acquisition unit 16.
  • the two or more pieces of point information are usually two or more pieces of point information received continuously. Further, the two or more pieces of point information are point information whose reception time difference is within a threshold value.
  • the spot related information acquisition unit 17 acquires the spot related information using only a part of predetermined spot information among the two or more pieces of spot information acquired by the spot information acquisition unit 16.
  • the spot-related information acquisition unit 17 acquires the spot-related information using only spot information of spots whose area range is within a certain range. Points within a certain area range include, for example, Kinkakuji, Ryoanji, Kobe Station, etc., but do not include Japan, Kyoto, Kobe, etc.
  • the point related information acquisition unit 17 is information for determining whether the area range is point information within a certain range (for example, “excludes prefectures”, “excludes prefectures and municipalities”).
  • the point relevant information acquisition part 17 may have this flag for every kind of point relevant information, such as a street view and map information, and for every point information.
  • the spot related information acquisition unit 17 continuously acquires two or more spot related information using the two or more spot information acquired by the spot information acquisition unit 16.
  • the spot related information acquisition unit 17 acquires spatial relation information and continuously acquires two or more spot related information using the spatial relation information.
  • the spatial relationship information is information indicating a spatial relationship between two or more pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit 16.
  • the spatial relationship information includes, for example, information indicating the inclusion relationship of the area of the point indicated by the two point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit 16 and the distance between the points indicated by the two point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit 16 It is information about.
  • the spatial relationship information is, for example, information indicating that the two areas indicated by the two point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit 16 are in an inclusion relationship, and the two areas indicated by the two point information are not included in the inclusion relationship.
  • the technique which acquires the information which shows the inclusion relation of two point information is a well-known technique.
  • the point-related information acquisition unit 17 acquires position information (longitude and latitude, or relative coordinate information in map information) indicating the areas of two pieces of point information, and whether the two points are in an inclusive relationship. Judge whether there is no inclusive relationship.
  • a technique for calculating the distance between two pieces of point information (for example, Kyoto and Kinkakuji) using map information is a known technique.
  • the point related information acquisition unit 17 uses the two or more pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit 16 to use the position information indicating the position of at least one piece of point information and the direction related to the direction between the two or more pieces of point information. Information is acquired, and a street view is acquired using the position information and the direction information. It is assumed that two or more pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit 16 are received in the order in which they appear in the program. For example, when the point A is first received and the point B is received next, the point related information acquisition unit 17 is configured to obtain the position information of the point A (for example, (latitude, longitude)). And position information of point B are acquired.
  • the point related information acquisition unit 17 is configured to obtain the position information of the point A (for example, (latitude, longitude)). And position information of point B are acquired.
  • the spot related information acquisition unit 17 acquires the direction information indicating the direction from the spot A to the spot B using the position information of the spot A and the position information of the spot B.
  • the location-related information acquisition unit 17 normally uses the map information in the map information storage unit 10 when acquiring location information from the location information, but may acquire location information from an external map server (not shown). .
  • the point related information acquisition unit 17 acquires the street view of the direction indicated by the direction information, which is the street view of the point A.
  • the direction information may be information indicating an absolute direction (for example, northwest, south-southeast, etc.) or information indicating a relative direction.
  • the point-related information acquisition unit 17 uses the position information of at least one piece of point information among the two or more pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit 16, and uses the position information camera. Get video. And the spot relevant information acquisition part 17 acquires the street view corresponding to the direction which direction information shows from the acquired camera image
  • a technique for acquiring a street view using position information (for example, (latitude, longitude)) is a known technique.
  • a technique for acquiring a street view using position information and direction information is a known technique.
  • the point related information acquisition unit 17 acquires spatial relationship information indicating a spatial relationship between two or more pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit 16 and acquires map information corresponding to the spatial relationship information. That is preferred.
  • the street view acquisition means 171 acquires one or two or more street views using the one or more point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit 16. It is preferable that the street view acquisition unit 171 continuously acquires two or more street views using the two or more pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit 16. By such processing, an operation of moving between two or more points in the street view can be output.
  • the street view acquisition unit 171 acquires the spatial relationship information, and continuously acquires two or more street views using the spatial relationship information.
  • the spatial relationship information of the two point information is “information indicating that the two points are not in an inclusive relationship and the distance between the two points is equal to or less than a threshold value”
  • the street view acquisition unit 171 has 2 Get street view of two points sequentially.
  • a street view is output so that it may move between two points using the sequentially acquired street view.
  • the map information acquisition unit 172 acquires one or more pieces of map information using one or more pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit 16.
  • the map information acquisition unit 172 normally acquires map information from the map information storage unit 10, but may acquire map information from an external map server (not shown). It is preferable that the map information acquisition unit 172 continuously acquires two or more pieces of map information using the two or more pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit 16. By such processing, the positional relationship between two or more points can be clearly grasped.
  • the map information acquisition unit 172 acquires the spatial relationship information and continuously acquires two or more pieces of map information using the spatial relationship information.
  • the spatial relationship information of two pieces of point information is “relationship where point A includes point B (B ⁇ A)
  • the map information acquisition unit 172 first acquires the map information corresponding to the point A, and then acquires the map information corresponding to the point B in a manner of zooming in. And after the map information corresponding to the point A is output, the map information corresponding to the point B is output in a manner of zooming in.
  • the spatial relationship information of two pieces of point information is “a relationship where point A is included in point B (A In the case of “information indicating that it is in ⁇ B)”
  • the map information acquisition means 172 first acquires the map information corresponding to the point A, and then zooms out the map information corresponding to the point B. get. And after the map information corresponding to the point A is output, the map information corresponding to the point B is output in a manner of zooming out.
  • the point related information acquisition unit 17 may acquire one or more pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit 16 as they are. The point information acquisition process need not be performed.
  • the spot related information acquisition unit 17 may acquire the spot related information including two or more pieces of spot information in a mode that clearly shows the order of appearance of the two or more spot information acquired by the spot information acquisition unit 16.
  • the aspect which specifies the appearance order of 2 or more point information is an aspect which connects 2 or more point information with the arrow in the order of appearance in a program, for example.
  • An aspect that clearly indicates the order of appearance of two or more pieces of point information is, for example, “A ⁇ B ⁇ C”. In such a case, for example, it is clearly shown that the performer of the program has moved from point A to point B and from point B to point C during the traveling program.
  • the point related information output unit 18 outputs one or more types of point related information acquired by the point related information acquisition unit 17 together with the program.
  • the spot related information output unit 18 may output one or more spot information acquired by the spot information acquisition unit 16.
  • the point related information output unit 18 preferably outputs two or more types of point related information together with the program.
  • the point related information output unit 18 preferably outputs the street view and the map information together with the program.
  • the point-related information output unit 18 does not output the point-related information such as street view and map information together with the program, but switches the output of the program to the output of the point-related information by receiving a user switching instruction or the like. Also good.
  • the program, street view, map information, and one or more point information are output to different windows. It does not matter whether the program, street view, map information, etc. are output. That is, the program and the spot related information may be output in the PinP mode, or the screen may be divided into a plurality of windows, and the program and the spot related information may be output in each of the plurality of windows (tile format). Window aspect). For example, street view, map information, etc. may be output to a small window in the program (PinP mode).
  • the spot related information output unit 18 outputs the movement of the spot related information by outputting two or more spot related information continuously acquired by the spot related information acquisition unit 17.
  • the movement of the point related information includes, for example, output indicating movement between two or more points by street view, zooming in and out of the map, and the like.
  • the spot related information output unit 18 outputs the street view in such a manner that two or more spots indicated by the two or more spot information are moved using the spatial relation information.
  • the output which shows the movement between two or more points by street view will present the route between two or more points in an easy-to-understand manner.
  • the spot related information output unit 18 outputs the map information in a different manner according to the spatial relation information.
  • the different modes include, for example, zoom in, zoom out, and movement.
  • the point related information output unit 18 is two pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit 16, and spatial relationship information between the first point information and the second point information received after the first point information. Accordingly, after outputting the map information corresponding to the first point information, it is preferable to output the second point information in such a manner that the map information corresponding to the second point information is zoomed in or out.
  • the spatial relationship information of two pieces of point information is “the point A is included in point B”
  • the point-related information output unit 18 outputs the map information indicating the point B while outputting the map information indicating the point A while zooming out.
  • the point-related information output unit 18 outputs the map information of the point A, and then zooms out and outputs the map information of the point B, so that the point A being broadcast in the program is moved to the region of the point B. It is possible to show that it is a point included.
  • the point-related information output unit 18 when the spatial relationship information is “information indicating that the point A is included in the point A”, the point-related information output unit 18 outputs the map information indicating the point A.
  • the map information indicating the point B is output while zooming in.
  • the point-related information output unit 18 outputs the map information of the point A, and then zooms in and outputs the map information of the point B, so that the point B being broadcast in the program is included in the area of the point A It is possible to show that it is a spot that can be read.
  • the point related information output unit 18 is two pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit 16, and spatial relationship information between the first point information and the second point information received after the first point information. Accordingly, map information including the point indicated by the first point information and the point indicated by the second point information is output.
  • the street view output means 181 outputs the street view acquired by the point related information acquisition unit 17 together with the program. It is preferable that the street view output unit 181 outputs a route moving in the street view by outputting two or more street views acquired successively by the spot related information acquisition unit 17. It is preferable that the street view output unit 181 outputs the street view in such a manner that two or more points indicated by the two or more point information are moved using the spatial relationship information.
  • the map information output means 182 outputs the map information acquired by the spot related information acquisition unit 17 together with the program.
  • the map information output means 182 outputs a relationship (for example, an inclusion relationship) between two or more points using the map information by outputting two or more map information continuously acquired by the point related information acquisition unit 17. It is preferable to do.
  • the spot information output means 183 outputs one or more spot information acquired by the spot information acquisition unit 16. It is preferable that the point information output means 183 outputs two or more pieces of point information in the order of appearance in the program. For example, it is preferable that the point information output means 183 connects two or more pieces of point information with arrows in the order of appearance in the program, and outputs the two or more pieces of point information.
  • the map information storage unit 10 and the spot related information storage unit 11 are preferably non-volatile recording media, but can also be realized by volatile recording media.
  • map information etc. may be stored in the map information storage unit 10 or the like via a recording medium, and map information or the like transmitted via a communication line or the like is stored in the map information storage unit 10 or the like.
  • map information or the like input via the input device may be stored in the map information storage unit 10 or the like.
  • the program receiving unit 13 and the program related information receiving unit 14 are usually realized by means for receiving broadcasts, but may be realized by wireless or wired communication means.
  • the program output unit 15 and the spot related information output unit 18 may or may not include an output device such as a display or a speaker.
  • the program output unit 15 may be implemented by output device driver software, or output device driver software and an output device.
  • the spot information acquisition unit 16 and the spot related information acquisition unit 17 can be usually realized by an MPU, a memory, or the like.
  • the processing procedure of the point information acquisition unit 16 is usually realized by software, and the software is recorded in a recording medium such as a ROM. However, it may be realized by hardware (dedicated circuit).
  • Step S201 The program receiving unit 13 determines whether or not a program has been received. If a program is received, the process goes to step S202, and if no program is received, the process goes to step S203.
  • Step S202 The program output unit 15 outputs the program received in step S201.
  • the program output unit 15 normally outputs a program to an area where the program is output.
  • Step S203 The program related information receiving unit 14 determines whether or not the program related information is received. If the program related information is received, the process goes to step S204, and if the program related information is not received, the process goes to step S212.
  • Step S204 The spot information acquisition unit 16 acquires one or more spot information from the program related information received in Step S203.
  • Step S205 The point-related information output unit 18 outputs one or more pieces of point information acquired in step S204 to a region (window) of the point information list.
  • the spot related information output unit 18 temporarily stores one or more pieces of spot information in the spot related information storage unit 11.
  • the point-related information output unit 18 outputs two or more pieces of point information to the region of the point information list in a manner in which the appearance order of two or more pieces of point information can be understood in the program.
  • the point-related information acquisition unit 17 acquires the history of the point information from the point-related information storage unit 11.
  • the history of the point information to be acquired (one or more pieces of point information) is, for example, point information output before a time within a threshold from the current time, or point information output immediately before.
  • the point related information acquisition unit 17 may not be able to acquire a history of point information.
  • the spot related information acquisition unit 17 uses one or more spot information acquired in step S204, or one or more spot information acquired in step S204 and a history of spot information acquired in step S206. Thus, the spatial relationship information of two or more point information is acquired.
  • the spot related information acquisition unit 17 usually acquires the spatial relationship information of the two spot information using the map information.
  • Step S208 The spot related information acquisition unit 17 acquires a street view corresponding to one or more spot information acquired in Step S204.
  • Step S209 The point-related information output unit 18 outputs the street view acquired in step S208 to the street view area in an output mode corresponding to the spatial relationship information acquired in step S207.
  • the spot related information output unit 18 temporarily stores the street view in the spot related information storage unit 11 in association with the spot information.
  • the point related information output unit 18 stores only the point information that outputs the street view or the position information corresponding to the point information that outputs the street view (for example, (latitude, longitude)). It is preferable to temporarily store in the unit 11.
  • the spot-related information acquisition unit 17 acquires map information corresponding to one or more spot information acquired in Step S204.
  • the map information corresponding to the point information is usually map information on a scale that includes all of the region of the point indicated by the point information, and position information (for example, (latitude, longitude)) acquired from the point information. Map information centered on However, the map information corresponding to the point information is scaled map information that includes the entire area of the point indicated by the point information, and centered on position information (for example, (latitude, longitude)) acquired from the point information. However, the map information included may be used. Further, the map information corresponding to the point information may be map information that does not include the entire point area indicated by the point information.
  • the point-related information output unit 18 outputs the map information acquired in Step S210 to the area of the map information in an output mode corresponding to the spatial relationship information acquired in Step S207.
  • the location-related information output unit 18 temporarily stores map information in the location-related information storage unit 11 in association with the location information.
  • the point related information output unit 18 uses only the point information of the point where the map information is output, or the position information (for example, (latitude, longitude)) corresponding to the point information where the map information is output, as the point related information storage unit. 11 is preferably stored temporarily.
  • Step S212 The receiving unit 12 determines whether an instruction has been received from the user. When the instruction is accepted, the process goes to step S213, and when the instruction is not accepted, the process returns to step S201. It is assumed that the instruction here is an instruction to the output point information.
  • Step S213 The point related information acquisition unit 17 acquires the instructed point information.
  • Step S214 The spot related information acquisition unit 17 acquires a street view corresponding to the acquired spot information from the spot related information storage unit 11. Then, the point related information output unit 18 outputs the acquired street view to the area of the street view.
  • the spot related information acquisition unit 17 may acquire a street view corresponding to the acquired spot information by the same process as in step S208.
  • Step S215) The point-related information acquisition unit 17 acquires map information corresponding to the acquired point information from the point-related information storage unit 11. And the spot relevant information output part 18 outputs the acquired map information to the area
  • the spot related information acquisition unit 17 may acquire the map information corresponding to the acquired spot information by the same process as in step S210.
  • the list of street view, map information, and point information is output, but one or more point related information of street view, map information, and point information may be output.
  • the receiving unit 12 may receive an instruction other than the point information instruction. In such a case, an operation corresponding to the instruction received by the receiving unit 12 is performed.
  • the processing is ended by powering off or interruption for aborting the processing.
  • the program-related information is a character string of text multiplex broadcasting.
  • the program is a television program.
  • the output control table is a table for determining an output mode of street view or / and map information, and is a table for controlling the output of street view or / and map information.
  • the output control table is a table for controlling the output of the spot related information using the inclusion relation between the two spot information (here, A and B) and the distance as parameters.
  • the two pieces of spot information are spot information included in the program-related information and are spot information included in the program-related information received within the threshold value simultaneously or temporally.
  • the two pieces of point information are point information included in the program related information in the same scene.
  • the line “inclusion relationship” indicates the inclusion relationship between the areas of the two point information (A and B).
  • the row “distance” indicates whether or not the distance between the two pieces of point information (A and B) is within a threshold value.
  • “within threshold” may be “smaller than threshold”
  • “greater than threshold” may be “greater than threshold”.
  • the row “explanation pattern” is information indicating a description pattern of the spot information.
  • the explanation pattern “point explanation” indicates that the spot information “B” should be explained
  • the explanation pattern “area explanation” indicates that the area indicated by the spot information “B” should be explained
  • the explanation pattern “route explanation” "Indicates that the route from A to B should be explained
  • the explanation pattern” comparison explanation "shows that A and B should be compared.
  • the row “street view control” is information relating to the control of the street view
  • “output B” indicates that the street view corresponding to the point information “B” is output.
  • “A ⁇ B” outputs a street view corresponding to the point information “A”, and outputs a street view corresponding to the point information “B” so as to move to the point of the point information “B”. Indicates.
  • Output A and B indicates that two street views of the point information “A” and the point information “B” are output.
  • the line “map control” is information relating to the output control of map information, and “map information” indicates the map information to be output, and when there are two or more pieces of information, two or more pieces of map information are sequentially output. Show.
  • the “transition method” indicates a transition method of two or more map information.
  • auxiliary information indicates auxiliary information to be output on the map information.
  • the auxiliary information “A, B emphasis” indicates that the points A and B are emphasized.
  • “Route emphasis” indicates that the route from point A to point B is emphasized.
  • the point A and the point B may be emphasized by outputting the point A and the point B in a different manner as compared with other points.
  • the method for emphasizing the points A and B is, for example, a display in which pins are set at the points A and B.
  • the highlighting method of the point A and the point B is making the name of the point A and the point B into a different color (for example, red) from other names, for example.
  • the route emphasis includes, for example, making a route line thicker than other lines, changing a color, and the like.
  • the first column (column “1”) of the output control table is when the inclusion relationship between the area indicated by the point information (A) and the area indicated by the point information (B) is “A ⁇ B”. Yes, indicating that the explanation pattern is “point explanation”.
  • Column “1” indicates that street view B is output.
  • the column “1” indicates that after the map information A is output, the map information B is zoomed in and output.
  • the column “1” indicates that the points A and B of the map information are output in an emphasized manner.
  • the street view B is a street view of the point of the point information “B”.
  • the map information A is map information including the point information “A”, and is map information corresponding to the point of the point information “A”.
  • the second column (column “2”) of the output control table is when the inclusion relationship between the area indicated by the point information (A) and the area indicated by the point information (B) is “A ⁇ B”. Yes, indicating that the explanation pattern is “region explanation”.
  • Column “2” indicates that street view A is output.
  • the column “2” indicates that after the map information A is output, the map information B is zoomed out and output.
  • the column “2” indicates that the points A and B of the map information are output in an emphasized manner.
  • the third column (column “3”) of the output control table is a case where there is no inclusion relationship between the area indicated by the point information (A) and the area indicated by the point information (B).
  • the distance is within the threshold value, and the explanation pattern is “route explanation”.
  • the column “3” indicates that after the street view A is output, the street view B is output so as to move to the point B.
  • the column “3” indicates that the map information B is output so as to move after the map information A is output.
  • Column “3” indicates that map information is output in a manner that emphasizes the route “A ⁇ B”.
  • the fourth column (column “4”) of the output control table is a case where there is no inclusion relationship between the area indicated by the point information (A) and the area indicated by the point information (B). This indicates that the explanation pattern is “comparison explanation”. Then, it is shown that street view A and street view B are output together. Column “4” indicates that map information including A and B is output. Column “4” indicates that the points A and B of the map information are output in an emphasized manner.
  • Specific example 1 is a case where the explanation pattern acquired using the spatial relationship information of a plurality of pieces of spot information is “spot explanation”.
  • the program receiving unit 13 receives the program. Then, the program output unit 15 outputs the received program.
  • the program related information receiving unit 14 receives text multiplex broadcasting.
  • the point information acquisition unit 16 is the received character multiplex broadcast, and acquires two pieces of point information “Kyoto, Kinkakuji” from the character multiplex broadcast within the threshold time (character multiplex broadcast of the program of the same scene).
  • the point information acquisition part 16 may acquire the place name as point information, for example, by performing a morphological analysis on the character string of the text multiplex broadcast, or the point information that matches one or more pieces of point information in the map information storage unit 10 May be extracted from the character string of the text multiplex broadcast.
  • the point information acquisition unit 16 may, for example, obtain a noun phrase immediately before a word that is determined to be “noun, proper noun, region, general” or a word that is determined to be “noun, suffix, region”. Acquired as point information.
  • the spot related information output unit 18 outputs the two spot information “Kyoto, Kinkakuji” to the area of the spot information list. Further, the spot related information output unit 18 temporarily stores the spot information “Kyoto, Kinkakuji” in the spot related information storage unit 11.
  • the spot-related information acquisition unit 17 acquires the spatial relation information “Kyoto-Kinkakuji” of the two spot information “Kyoto, Kinkakuji”. Then, the street view acquisition unit 171 refers to the output control table and acquires a street view corresponding to “Kinkakuji”. Next, the street view output means 181 outputs the acquired street view.
  • the map information acquisition means 172 acquires map information corresponding to “Kyoto”. Next, map information corresponding to “Kinkakuji” is acquired. Then, the map information output means 182 outputs the map information corresponding to “Kinkakuji” in a manner of zooming in after outputting the map information corresponding to “Kyoto”.
  • FIG. 4 An output example in such a case is shown in FIG.
  • 41 is a program
  • 42 is a street view
  • 43 is map information
  • 44 is a list of point information.
  • reception unit 12 receives the instruction of “Kinkakuji” in 44 of FIG. 4, a street view corresponding to “Kinkakuji” is output.
  • the reception unit 12 receives the map information, the map information corresponding to “Kinkakuji” is output.
  • An output example may be as shown in FIG. 5, 51 is a program, 52 is a street view, and 53 is map information. In FIG. 5, the list of point information is not output.
  • Specific example 2 is a case where the explanation pattern acquired using the spatial relationship information of a plurality of pieces of point information is “region explanation”.
  • the program receiving unit 13 receives the program. Then, the program output unit 15 outputs the received program.
  • the program related information receiving unit 14 receives a text multiplex broadcast of a program in the same scene.
  • the point information acquisition unit 16 has acquired two pieces of point information “Kinkakuji, Kyoto” from the received text multiplex broadcast.
  • the spot related information output unit 18 outputs the two spot information “Kinkakuji, Kyoto” to the area of the spot information list. Further, the spot related information output unit 18 temporarily stores the spot information “Kinkakuji, Kyoto” in the spot related information storage unit 11.
  • the spot related information acquisition unit 17 acquires the spatial relation information “Kinkakuji-Kyoto” of the two spot information “Kyoto, Kinkakuji”. Then, the street view acquisition unit 171 refers to the output control table and acquires a street view corresponding to “Kinkakuji”. Next, the street view output means 181 outputs the acquired street view.
  • the map information acquisition means 172 acquires map information corresponding to “Kinkakuji”. Next, map information corresponding to “Kyoto” is acquired. Then, the map information output means 182 outputs the map information corresponding to “Kyoto” in a manner of zooming out after outputting the map information corresponding to “Kinkakuji”.
  • Specific example 3 is a case where the explanation pattern acquired using the spatial relationship information of a plurality of pieces of point information is “route explanation”.
  • the program receiving unit 13 receives the program. Then, the program output unit 15 outputs the received program.
  • the program related information receiving unit 14 receives a text multiplex broadcast of a program in the same scene.
  • the point information acquisition unit 16 has acquired two pieces of point information “Kinkakuji, Ryoanji” from the received text multiplex broadcast.
  • the point related information output unit 18 outputs two pieces of point information “Kinkakuji, Ryoanji” to the area of the point information list.
  • the point related information output unit 18 temporarily stores the point information “Kinkakuji, Ryoanji” in the point related information storage unit 11.
  • the spot related information acquisition unit 17 acquires the inclusion relation “none” in the spatial relation information of the two spot information “Kinkakuji, Ryoanji”. Then, the spot related information acquisition unit 17 acquires (latitude, longitude) of the two spot information “Kinkakuji, Ryoanji” using the map information of the map information storage unit 10. Next, the spot related information acquisition unit 17 acquires the distance X of the two spot information “Kinkakuji, Ryoanji”. Next, the spot related information acquisition unit 17 determines that the distance X is within a threshold value.
  • the street view acquisition unit 171 refers to the output control table and acquires a street view corresponding to “Kinkakuji”.
  • the street view output means 181 outputs the acquired street view.
  • the street view acquisition means 171 refers to the output control table and acquires a street view corresponding to “Ryoanji”.
  • the street view output means 181 outputs the street view corresponding to “Ryoanji” so as to move from “Kinkakuji” to “Ryoanji” in the street view.
  • a technique for outputting a street view that moves between two points is a known technique.
  • the map information acquisition means 172 acquires map information corresponding to “Kinkakuji”. Next, map information corresponding to “Ryoanji” is acquired. Then, the map information output means 182 outputs the map information corresponding to “Ryoanji” in a manner of moving after outputting the map information corresponding to “Kinkakuji”. Further, the map information output means 182 emphasizes and outputs the route from Kinkakuji to Ryoanji. In this case, it is assumed that the map information acquisition unit 172 has a route search function. Moreover, since the route search function using map information is a well-known technique, the description thereof is omitted.
  • Specific example 4 is a case where the explanation pattern acquired using the spatial relationship information of a plurality of pieces of point information is “comparison explanation”.
  • the program receiving unit 13 receives the program. Then, the program output unit 15 outputs the received program.
  • the program related information receiving unit 14 receives a text multiplex broadcast of a program in the same scene.
  • the point information acquisition unit 16 has acquired two pieces of point information “Kinkakuji, Ginkakuji” from the received text multiplex broadcast.
  • the spot related information output unit 18 outputs the two spot information “Kinkakuji, Ginkakuji” to the area of the spot information list.
  • the point related information output unit 18 temporarily stores the point information “Kinkakuji, Ginkakuji” in the point related information storage unit 11.
  • the spot related information acquisition unit 17 acquires the inclusion relation “none” in the spatial relation information of the two spot information “Kinkakuji, Ginkakuji”.
  • the point-related information acquisition unit 17 acquires (latitude, longitude) of the two point information “Kinkakuji, Ginkakuji” using the map information in the map information storage unit 10.
  • the spot related information acquisition unit 17 acquires the distance X of the two spot information “Kinkakuji, Ginkakuji”.
  • the spot related information acquisition unit 17 determines that the distance X is longer than the threshold value.
  • the street view acquisition unit 171 refers to the output control table and acquires a street view corresponding to “Kinkakuji”.
  • the street view output means 181 outputs the acquired street view.
  • the street view acquisition means 171 acquires a street view corresponding to “Ginkakuji”.
  • the street view output means 181 outputs the acquired street view. That is, the area 42 in FIG. 4 is divided into two, and two street views are output.
  • the map information acquisition means 172 acquires map information including “Kinkakuji” and “Ginkakuji”. Then, the map information output means 182 outputs map information including “Kinkakuji” and “Ginkakuji”. Then, the map information output means 182 highlights “Kinkakuji” and “Ginkakuji” on the map.
  • two or more pieces of point related information can be acquired continuously using two or more pieces of point information, and the movement of the point related information can be output. Accordingly, it is possible to provide the program receiving apparatus 1 that can easily output two or more point-related information regarding two or more points appearing in the program together with the program and can understand the movement of the point in the program more deeply.
  • a program receiving apparatus 1 that can output a street view regarding a point appearing in a program together with the program, and can convey a sense of distance and surrounding atmosphere that are difficult to express in the program.
  • processing in the present embodiment may be realized by software. Then, this software may be distributed by software download or the like. Further, this software may be recorded on a recording medium such as a CD-ROM and distributed. This also applies to other embodiments in this specification. Note that the software that implements the information processing apparatus according to the present embodiment is the following program.
  • the program includes a program receiving unit that receives a program, a program related information receiving unit that receives program related information that is information related to the program and includes one or more pieces of point information, A program output unit for outputting a program received by the program receiving unit, a point information acquiring unit for acquiring one or more pieces of point information from the program related information received by the program related information receiving unit, and the point information acquiring unit It is information corresponding to the acquired point information, and a point related information acquisition unit that acquires one or more types of point related information that is information related to the point information, and one or two types acquired by the point related information acquisition unit It is a program for functioning as the point related information output part which outputs the above point related information with the said program.
  • the point-related information acquisition unit continuously acquires two or more point-related information using the two or more point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit
  • the point-related information output unit Is preferably a program that causes a computer to function as outputting movement of point-related information by outputting two or more pieces of point-related information continuously acquired by the point-related information acquisition unit.
  • the point-related information acquisition unit acquires spatial relationship information indicating a spatial relationship between two or more pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit, and uses the spatial relationship information.
  • it is a program that causes a computer to function by continuously acquiring two or more spot-related information and assuming that the acquisition method of the two or more spot-related information differs according to the acquired spatial relation information. Is preferred.
  • the one or more types of point-related information are programs that cause a computer to function as including street view.
  • the point-related information acquisition unit uses the two or more pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit to use the position information indicating the position of at least one piece of point information, and the two or more pieces of point information.
  • the program is a program that causes a computer to function as the one that acquires direction information regarding the directions in between and acquires the street view using the position information and the direction information.
  • the location-related information acquisition unit acquires the camera image of the position information using the position information, and uses the direction information in the direction indicated by the direction information from the acquired camera image. It is preferable that the program obtains the corresponding street view so that the computer functions.
  • the one or more types of point-related information includes street view
  • the point-related information output unit uses the spatial relationship information to indicate two or more points indicated by the two or more point information. It is preferable that the program is a program that causes a computer to function as an output of street view in a manner of moving the point.
  • the one or more types of point-related information is a program that causes a computer to function as including map information.
  • the point-related information acquisition unit acquires spatial relationship information indicating a spatial relationship between two or more pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit, and corresponds to the spatial relationship information.
  • the point-related information output unit is a program that causes a computer to function as outputting map information in a different manner according to the spatial relationship information.
  • the point-related information output unit is two pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit, and the second point received after the first point information and the first point information. According to the spatial relationship information with the information, after outputting the map information corresponding to the first point information, the second information is zoomed in or zoomed out to the map information corresponding to the second point information.
  • a program that causes a computer to function as the point information output is suitable.
  • the point-related information output unit is two pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit, and the second point received after the first point information and the first point information. It is a program that causes a computer to function as outputting map information including a point indicated by the first point information and a point indicated by the second point information in accordance with spatial relation information with the information. Is preferred.
  • one or more key information is acquired from program-related information (for example, subtitle data broadcast by text multiplex broadcasting, an electronic program guide, a web page explaining the contents of a program, etc.), and the one or more key information is acquired.
  • program-related information for example, subtitle data broadcast by text multiplex broadcasting, an electronic program guide, a web page explaining the contents of a program, etc.
  • An information processing apparatus that outputs program auxiliary information for assisting a program using key information will be described.
  • the key information is a term belonging to a predetermined category, and details thereof will be described later.
  • an information processing apparatus that outputs different types of program auxiliary information according to the relationship (for example, spatial relationship) between two or more pieces of key information will be described.
  • an information processing apparatus for changing program auxiliary information to be output and a method for outputting program auxiliary information (layout, etc.) according to the type of program will be described.
  • two or more pieces of key information which are two or more key information, are used to determine transportation means (walking, train, etc.) of movement, and program assistance such as a map that is output using the determination result.
  • transportation means walking, train, etc.
  • program assistance such as a map that is output using the determination result.
  • FIG. 6 is a block diagram of the information processing apparatus 2 in the present embodiment.
  • the information processing apparatus 2 includes a map information storage unit 10, a reception unit 12, a program reception unit 13, a program related information reception unit 14, a program output unit 15, an electronic program guide storage unit 20, a key information acquisition unit 21, and a scene determination unit 22. , A program type acquisition unit 23, a moving means information acquisition unit 24, a program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25, and a program auxiliary information output unit 26.
  • the program related information receiving unit 14 is information related to the program being output, and receives program related information including one or more key information.
  • the program-related information is subtitle data by character multiplex broadcasting, an electronic program guide, a Web page explaining the contents of the program, and the like.
  • the key information is point information which is a term belonging to the point category.
  • the electronic program guide storage unit 20 can store an electronic program guide.
  • the electronic program guide is usually information received by the information processing apparatus 2.
  • the electronic program guide is received by, for example, the program related information receiving unit 14 or the program receiving unit 13.
  • the key information acquisition unit 21 acquires one or more key information, which are terms belonging to a predetermined category, from the program related information received by the program related information receiving unit 14.
  • the predetermined category may be said to be information of a predetermined type, or may be information having a predetermined attribute.
  • the predetermined category includes, for example, a place name, a person name, a program name, and a television station name. That is, the key information is point information indicating a point, personal name information indicating a personal name, and the like. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the key information is mainly point information.
  • the key information acquisition unit 21 preferably acquires two or more pieces of key information from the program related information received by the program related information receiving unit 14.
  • the technique in which the key information acquisition unit 21 acquires key information such as point information or personal name information from program-related information is a known technique.
  • the key information acquisition unit 21 performs morphological analysis on program-related information and acquires a noun or noun phrase.
  • the key information acquisition part 21 searches the map information storage part 10 by using the acquired noun or noun phrase as a key, and acquires the key information which is point information.
  • the key information acquisition unit 21 searches a personal name dictionary (not shown) using the acquired noun or noun phrase as a key, and acquires key information that is a personal name.
  • the personal name dictionary may be held by the information processing apparatus 2 or may be subjected to a web search.
  • the scene determination unit 22 determines scene switching in the program. For example, the scene determination unit 22 determines that the scene has been switched when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) or more has elapsed since the key information was acquired. That is, for example, the scene determination unit 22 determines that the scene has been switched when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) or more has elapsed since the acquisition of the latest key information among the acquired key information. . The scene determination unit 22 determines that the scene has been switched, for example, periodically (for example, every 15 seconds). For example, the scene determination unit 22 determines that the scene has been switched when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses after the key information acquisition unit 21 first acquires the key information.
  • a predetermined time for example, 15 seconds
  • the scene determination unit 22 compares the image of the currently output program with the image output immediately before and determines that there is more than a predetermined change, the scene is switched. to decide.
  • a technique for obtaining the similarity or difference between two images is a known technique, and the scene determination unit 22 uses the similarity or difference to determine whether there is a change greater than a predetermined value. You may judge.
  • the program type acquisition unit 23 acquires the type of program.
  • the program type acquisition unit 23 is the genre of the program in the electronic program guide stored in the electronic program guide storage unit 20, and acquires the genre of the program being output.
  • the type of program is usually the genre of the program.
  • the moving means information acquisition unit 24 acquires moving means information indicating the type of moving means used in the program using two or more pieces of key information.
  • the key information is usually point information.
  • the moving means information acquisition unit 24 acquires the moving speed using the time interval at which two pieces of point information appear and the distance between the two points indicated by the two pieces of point information, and uses the moving speed, Decide whether to move on foot, move by train, or move by car.
  • the moving means information acquisition unit 24 stores, for example, two or more sets of moving means information and information indicating the width of the moving speed, and acquires moving means information corresponding to the acquired moving speed.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 is information corresponding to the key information acquired by the key information acquisition unit 21, and acquires program auxiliary information which is information supplementing the contents of the program.
  • the program auxiliary information is, for example, information indicating a photograph, street view, map information, a blog, a train route, and the like.
  • the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 may acquire a photograph with key information as an attribute.
  • the program supplementary information acquisition part 25 may search for the photograph on Web using key information as a key, and may acquire a photograph.
  • the program supplementary information acquisition part 25 may acquire the map of the area
  • the program supplementary information acquisition part 25 may acquire the street view corresponding to 1 or 2 or more each point information.
  • the program supplementary information acquisition part 25 may search the blog corresponding to the person name which is key information from Web.
  • the blog corresponding to the person name is a blog written by a person identified by the person name.
  • the information indicating the train route is information indicating the route from the departure station to the arrival station. Note that the technology for acquiring information indicating the route from the departure station to the arrival station is a known technology (see, for example, the URL “http://www.jorudan.co.jp/”).
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires the program auxiliary information using two or more pieces of key information acquired by the key information acquisition unit 21.
  • the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 includes map information including all two or more points indicated by two or more point information, two or three or more street views on the route of two or more points, and photographs regarding two or more points. It is preferable to acquire
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires the program auxiliary information by using two or more key information continuously acquired by the key information acquisition unit 21.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 may acquire two or more types of program auxiliary information.
  • the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires, for example, street view and map information.
  • the program supplementary information acquisition part 25 acquires a photograph, a street view, and map information, for example.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires different types of program auxiliary information according to the relationship between two or more pieces of key information.
  • the key information is, for example, point information
  • the relationship is, for example, a spatial relationship.
  • the spatial relationship is, for example, an inclusion relationship between two points indicated by two key information, or a relationship related to a distance between two points (whether it is closer or farther than a threshold value).
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires spatial relationship information indicating a spatial relationship between two or more pieces of point information acquired by the key information acquisition unit 21, and uses the spatial relationship information to acquire two or more program auxiliary information. Get information continuously.
  • the program auxiliary information may include point-related information that is information about the point. Further, the program auxiliary information may include person-related information that is information about a person.
  • the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs the program auxiliary information acquired by the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25.
  • the program auxiliary information output unit 26 holds, for example, one or more output control information.
  • the output control information is information for specifying one or more types of program auxiliary information to be output, and / or information for determining an output method of one or more types of program auxiliary information.
  • the output control information includes, for example, spatial relationship information indicating a spatial relationship between two or more key information, an explanation pattern identifier for identifying a description pattern, and information indicating an output method of one or more types of program auxiliary information.
  • the explanation pattern identifier is an identifier for determining an output mode of program auxiliary information, and is information indicating a pattern for assisting a program.
  • the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs one or two or more types of program auxiliary information among two or more types of program auxiliary information.
  • the program auxiliary information output unit 26 may output the program auxiliary information to a display different from the device that outputs the program.
  • the program auxiliary information output unit 26 may output the program auxiliary information to a device different from the device that outputs the program.
  • the program auxiliary information output unit 26 may transmit the program auxiliary information to a device different from the device that outputs the program.
  • another apparatus for example, portable terminals, such as a smart phone
  • program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs other types of program auxiliary information when one type of program auxiliary information cannot be output.
  • the program supplementary information output unit 26 does not continuously output the program supplementary information when the scenes determined by the scene determination unit 22 are switched.
  • the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs other types of program auxiliary information corresponding to the key information acquired by the key information acquisition unit 21 when the street view corresponding to the key information acquired by the key information acquisition unit 21 cannot be output. It is preferable to output.
  • the program auxiliary information output unit 26 changes the type of program auxiliary information to be output according to the type of program.
  • the program auxiliary information output unit 26 preferably changes the output mode of the program auxiliary information according to the type of program.
  • the program auxiliary information output unit 26 changes the output mode of the program auxiliary information according to the moving means information. Also, it is preferable that the program auxiliary information output unit 26 selects and outputs the program auxiliary information to be output according to the moving means information. For example, when the moving means information is information indicating “train”, it is preferable that the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs information indicating the train route instead of or in addition to the map information. is there.
  • the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs the program auxiliary information together with the program.
  • the electronic program guide storage unit 20 is preferably a non-volatile recording medium, but can also be realized by a volatile recording medium.
  • the process of storing the electronic program guide in the electronic program guide storage unit 20 does not matter.
  • the electronic program guide may be stored in the electronic program guide storage unit 20 via a recording medium, and the electronic program guide transmitted via a communication line or the like is stored in the electronic program guide storage unit 20.
  • the electronic program guide input via the input device may be stored in the electronic program guide storage unit 20.
  • the key information acquisition unit 21, the scene determination unit 22, the program type acquisition unit 23, the moving means information acquisition unit 24, and the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 can be usually realized by an MPU, a memory, or the like.
  • the processing procedure of the key information acquisition unit 21 and the like is usually realized by software, and the software is recorded on a recording medium such as a ROM. However, it may be realized by hardware (dedicated circuit).
  • the program auxiliary information output unit 26 may be considered as including or not including an output device such as a display or a speaker.
  • the program auxiliary information output unit 26 can be realized by driver software of an output device or driver software and an output device of an output device.
  • Step S701 The key information acquisition unit 21 acquires one or more key information from the program related information received in step S203.
  • the key information acquisition unit 21 may output the acquired one or more key information to a display or the like.
  • Step S702 The program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires one or more types of program auxiliary information using the one or more key information acquired in step S701.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
  • Step S703 The program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs one or more types of program auxiliary information acquired in step S702. The process returns to step S201. Program auxiliary information output processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
  • Step S704 The receiving unit 12 determines whether an instruction has been received from the user. When the instruction is accepted, the process goes to step S705, and when the instruction is not accepted, the process returns to step S201. It is assumed that the instruction here is an instruction to the output key information.
  • Step S705 The program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires key information corresponding to the instruction received in step S704.
  • Step S706 The program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires one or more types of program auxiliary information corresponding to the key information acquired in step S705.
  • Step S707 The program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs one or more types of program auxiliary information acquired in step S706. The process returns to step S201.
  • the acquired key information is output.
  • the acquired key information may not be output. In such a case, an instruction for the output key information is not accepted.
  • the processing is ended by powering off or interruption of processing end.
  • step S702 the process of acquiring the program auxiliary information in step S702 will be described using the flowchart of FIG.
  • Step S801 The program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 temporarily stores the acquired one or more key information in a buffer (not shown).
  • Step S802 The scene determination unit 22 determines whether a scene change of the program being output has occurred. If it is determined that scene switching has occurred, the process proceeds to step S706, and if it is determined that scene switching has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S803.
  • Step S803 The program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires one or more key information temporarily stored in a buffer (not shown).
  • the one or more key information is key information accumulated in the same scene.
  • Step S804 The program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires the spatial relationship information using the one or more key information acquired in Step S803.
  • the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 usually acquires spatial relationship information of two pieces of key information using map information.
  • the method in which the program supplementary information acquisition part 25 acquires spatial relationship information is the same as the method in which the spot relevant information acquisition part 17 acquires spatial relationship information, detailed description is abbreviate
  • Step S805 The program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires an explanation pattern identifier corresponding to the spatial relationship information from one or more output control information.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 is one or more types of program auxiliary information corresponding to the explanation pattern identifier acquired in step S805, and program auxiliary information corresponding to the one or more key information acquired in step S803. To get. Return to upper process. Note that the one or more types of program auxiliary information are, for example, one or more types of information of street view, map information, photos, and the like.
  • step S703 the program auxiliary information output process in step S703 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
  • Step S901 The movement means information acquisition unit 24 calculates a movement distance (movement speed) per unit time using the two or more key information acquired in Step S803. Next, the moving means information acquisition unit 24 acquires moving means information corresponding to the moving speed. Here, the movement means information acquisition unit 24 may not be able to acquire movement means information.
  • Step S902 The program auxiliary information output unit 26 acquires the program identifier of the program output by the program output unit 15. Then, the program auxiliary information output unit 26 acquires the program type (genre) corresponding to the program identifier from the electronic program guide in the electronic program guide storage unit 20.
  • Step S903 The program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs one or more types of program auxiliary information to be output using one or more pieces of information of the moving means information acquired in step S901 and the type of program acquired in step S902. Determine the output layout.
  • Step S904 The program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs one or more types of program auxiliary information acquired by the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 in accordance with the output layout determined in step S903. Return to upper process.
  • the program auxiliary information output unit 26 may output the program auxiliary information without using the moving means information and the type of program.
  • the program related information is subtitle data in TV programs.
  • the key information to be acquired is point information.
  • the point information is usually a place name here. That is, the program related information receiving unit 14 acquires the caption data of the output program.
  • the key information acquisition unit 21 acquires point information from the caption data.
  • the scene determination unit 22 assumes that the scene has switched when a predetermined time (in this case, 15 seconds) or more has elapsed since the acquisition of the latest key information among the acquired key information. to decide.
  • the program type acquisition unit 23 acquires the genre of the program being output from the electronic program guide.
  • the genre includes news, sports, variety, drama and the like.
  • the movement means information acquisition unit 24 holds a movement means determination management table shown in FIG.
  • the moving means determination management table is a table for determining moving means.
  • the moving means determination management table manages one or more records having “speed”, “point information”, and “moving means”.
  • FIG. 10 for example, “when the speed (x) is a 1 or less, the moving means information acquisition unit 24 acquires moving means information“ walking ”.
  • FIG. 10 for example, when “the speed (x) is larger than a 1 and smaller than or equal to a 2 and the point information used when determining the speed matches“. * Station ”, the moving means information The acquisition unit 24 indicates that the moving means information “train” is acquired.
  • “. * Station” is a character string whose last character is “station”.
  • FIG. 10 for example, when “speed (x) is greater than a 1 and less than or equal to a 3 and is not a“ train ”, the moving means information acquisition unit 24 acquires the moving means information“ automobile ”. Indicates.
  • program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires the program auxiliary information using the output control table shown in FIG. Further, the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs one or more types of program auxiliary information acquired by the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 using the output control table shown in FIG.
  • the output control table here is a table for determining the output mode of street view or / and map information or / and photos, and is a table for controlling the output of street view or / and map information or / and photos. It is.
  • the output control table has information on the spatial relationship between the points (here, A and B) indicated by the two point information.
  • the spatial relationship information includes the inclusion relationship, the area size, and the distance. That is, the output control table is a table for controlling the output of the spot related information using the inclusion relation, the area width, and the distance as parameters.
  • the two pieces of spot information are spot information included in the program-related information and are spot information included in the program-related information received within the threshold value simultaneously or temporally.
  • the program related information includes information on switching the program scene
  • the two pieces of point information are point information included in the program related information in the same scene.
  • the output control table has “spatial relationship ID”, “spatial relationship information”, “spatial relationship”, “explanation pattern”, and “output control”.
  • the “spatial relationship ID” is an identifier that indicates a spatial relationship between points (here, A and B) indicated by two pieces of point information.
  • “Spatial relationship information” is information indicating the spatial relationship between the points (here, A and B) indicated by the two point information.
  • “Spatial relationship” is information for determining “spatial relationship information”, and has “inclusion relationship”, “area width”, and “distance” here. That is, here, the spatial relationship between A and B is determined using the inclusion relation of the regions A and B, the width of the regions A and B, and the distance between A and B.
  • “Description pattern” indicates an auxiliary mode of the program. If the “description pattern” is determined, the type and output mode of the program auxiliary information to be output is determined. Here, the type of program auxiliary information is one or more of street view, map, and photograph. Spatial relationship is also called geographical relationship. “Output control” indicates program-related information to be output and an output mode. The “output control” includes “street view control” indicating the output mode of the street view, “map control” indicating the output mode of the map, and “photo control” indicating the output mode of the photograph.
  • Each place name indicated by the point information has an area. For example, areas such as prefectures and municipalities are different.
  • the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 determines the region relationship between the two place names that are in a chronological relationship along the time series.
  • the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 uses 9-intersection (“Yohei Kurata. Topological spatial relation research and future issues in geographic information science. GIS -Theory and application, Vol. 18, No 2, pp. 41-51 (2010) ”).
  • 9-intersection the relationship between two points is classified into nine patterns.
  • overlapping of geographical area boundaries is not important in the program structure, and 9-intersection is changed without considering the overlapping of area boundaries.
  • “separation” is when the area of two place names is completely separated. For example, since the place names “Fukuoka Prefecture” and “Kagoshima Prefecture” are completely separated, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 determines that the geographical relationship is “separation”. And the program supplementary information acquisition part 25 acquires spatial relationship information "equal".
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 further classifies the relationship of “separation” in detail according to the distance between two points and the area size. That is, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 has the inclusion relationship “separation”, and there are two types of cases where the distance between the two points is nearer than the threshold and when the distance is farther than the threshold. This relationship is further classified in detail. Further, the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 further details the relationship of “separation” on the assumption that there are two types of areas, that is, a wide area where the area of each of the two points is wider than the threshold and a boundary where the area is narrower than the threshold.
  • Classify into When the inclusion relationship is “separation”, the area is “wide” that is wider than the threshold, and the distance between the two points is “close” that is closer than the threshold, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 selects the spatial relationship information “ “disjoin-n (wide area)” is acquired. In addition, when the inclusion relationship is “separation”, the area is “wide” wider than the threshold, and the distance between the two points is “far” farther than the threshold, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 selects the spatial relationship information “ “disjoin-f (wide area)” is acquired.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 selects the spatial relationship information “ get “disjoin-n”. Further, in the case of the inclusion relationship “separation”, the area width is “narrow” which is narrower than the threshold, and the distance between the two points is “far” which is far from the threshold, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 selects the spatial relationship information “ "disjoin-f (narrow area)" is acquired.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 determines that the geographical relationship is the inclusion relationship “separation”. Further, for example, it is determined that “Fukuoka Prefecture” and “Kagoshima Prefecture” are far from each other and each point is a wide area, and the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires the spatial relation information “disjoin-f (wide area)”. To do. In determining the distance, a threshold may be set for each program genre or for each program.
  • the inclusion relationship “outside contact” is a case where a part of the boundary between two place name areas overlaps. For example, since “Fukuoka Prefecture” and “Saga Prefecture” are adjacent to each other, the inclusion relationship of these place names becomes “outside contact”, and the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires the spatial relationship information “meet”.
  • the inclusion relationship “duplicate” is when there is an overlap in part of the area of two place names. For example, since the relationship between two place names “Hitoyoshi City” and “Kuma River” is “overlap”, the inclusion relation of these place names becomes “overlap”, and the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 uses the spatial relationship information “overlap”. Is obtained.
  • the inclusion relationship “inclusive” means that the place names of A and B are in the inclusion relationship (A ⁇ B). For example, if the relationship between two place names “Fukuoka Prefecture” and “Hakata Station” is extracted sequentially, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 includes “Hakata Station” in “Fukuoka Prefecture”. , Get spatial relation information “contains”.
  • the inclusion relationship “inherent” means that the place name of A and B is in an inherent relationship (A ⁇ B). For example, when the place name “Fukuoka Prefecture” appears after the place name “Hakata Station”, since “Hakata Station” exists in the area of “Fukuoka Prefecture”, the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 spatially Get related information "inside”.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 can classify the spatial relationship between the two points into nine patterns using the inclusion relationship between the two points, the area width, and the distance. And the program supplementary information acquisition part 25 can determine the description pattern with respect to each nine spatial relationships as shown in FIG.
  • the explanation pattern is “point explanation” explaining the one or two places.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires a map including one point, and the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs the map.
  • the program supplementary information acquisition part 25 acquires the photograph corresponding to one point, and the program supplementary information output part 26 outputs the said photograph.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires the map of A, and the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs the map of A.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires a map of B, and the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs the map of B so as to zoom in from the map of A to the map of B.
  • the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires the A photograph, and the program supplementary information output unit 26 outputs the A photograph.
  • the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires the B photograph, and the program supplementary information output unit 26 outputs the B photograph.
  • the explanation pattern is “point comparison” that is explained by comparing the two points (A and B). It is.
  • the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires a map including A and B, and the program supplementary information output unit 26 outputs the map.
  • the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires the A photograph, and the program supplementary information output unit 26 outputs the A photograph.
  • the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires the B photograph, and the program supplementary information output unit 26 outputs the B photograph.
  • the explanation pattern is “route explanation” explaining the route to the two points.
  • the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs a route between two points using a map and a street view here. That is, the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires a map including two place names (A and B). And the program supplementary information acquisition part 25 searches the path
  • the program supplementary information acquisition part 25 acquires the street view of each point on a path
  • the program supplementary information output part 26 outputs the street view which the program supplementary information acquisition part 25 acquired sequentially.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 and the program auxiliary information output unit 26 rotate the camera by a predetermined angle (for example, 180 degrees) at the start point (A) and the end point (B) to produce an effect of looking around the surroundings. It is preferable to apply.
  • the explanation pattern is “region explanation” explaining the region including the two points.
  • “Region explanation” includes “Region explanation (1)” and “Region explanation (2)”.
  • the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires a map including an overlapping area of A and B, and the program supplementary information output unit 26 outputs the map.
  • the program supplementary information acquisition part 25 acquires the photograph of the duplication area
  • the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires the map of A and B, and the program supplementary information output unit 26 outputs the map of A, and then zooms in the map of B from the map of A As shown, the map of B is output. Moreover, the program supplementary information acquisition part 25 acquires the photograph of A and B, and the program supplementary information output part 26 outputs the photograph of B, after outputting the photograph of A.
  • the program auxiliary information output unit 26 uses the table of FIG. 11 to display one or more types of program auxiliary information acquired by the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 as 1 or 2 corresponding to the explanation pattern of FIG. More than one type of program auxiliary information is output using one or more pieces of information of “street view control”, “map control”, and “photo control”. (Experiment)
  • the program receiving unit 13 receives the above program. Further, the program related information receiving unit 14 receives subtitle data which is program related information of the program.
  • the program output unit 15 outputs a program.
  • the key information acquisition unit 21 has acquired point information that is a term belonging to a predetermined category from the caption data.
  • the key information acquisition unit 21 is “Kyushu” ⁇ “Fukuoka” ⁇ “Oita” ⁇ “Jien no Taki” ⁇ “Oita” ⁇ “Yufuin Station” ⁇ “Mt. It is assumed that point information as key information is sequentially acquired in the order of “Kagoshima” ⁇ “Kaegyogawa Station” (see FIG. 12).
  • the key information acquisition unit 21 acquires key information and time information together. In FIG. 12, the image (1201) constituting the output program, the acquired spot information and its time information (1202), and the spatial relationship (1203) between the two spots indicated by the two spot information are described. Has been. Further, the time information is information that specifies when key information appears.
  • the scene determination unit 22 determines the same scene when the next place name appears within 15 seconds after the first point information appears.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires the program auxiliary information using the first point information “Kyushu” so that the performance of “Kyushu” alone is performed.
  • the effect of a single point is to output map information and a photograph of the point.
  • the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires a map of the scale of “Kyushu” from the map information storage unit 10 or the Web. Then, the program supplementary information output unit 26 displays a map of “Kyushu” on a map output area. It is the map where 1301 of the screen (a) of FIG. 13 is displayed. Reference numeral 1302 denotes a displayed program, and 1303 denotes point information acquired and displayed.
  • the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 searches for and acquires a photograph using the key information “Kyushu”. Note that the set of photos may be stored in a recording medium (not shown) by the information processing apparatus 2 or may be retrieved from the Web. Then, the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs a photograph relating to “Kyushu” until the next spot information appears (see 1304 in FIG. 13).
  • the key information acquisition unit 21 acquires point information “Fukuoka”.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires the spatial relationship information “contains” between “Kyushu” and “Fukuoka”.
  • the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires a map of “Fukuoka” according to the explanation pattern “point explanation (2)” corresponding to the spatial relation information “contains”.
  • the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs map information for zooming in from the “Kyushu” area to the “Fukuoka” area (see 1305 in FIG. 13).
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires a photograph using “Fukuoka” as a key. Then, the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs the photograph of “Fukuoka” (see 1306 in FIG. 13).
  • the spot information “Oita” appeared immediately after the spot information “Fukuoka” appeared in the caption data. Then, the key information acquisition unit 21 acquires “Oita”.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 determines that “Oita” is “Oita Prefecture”, and extracts an inclusion relationship “Fukuoka” disjoint “Oita” based on the area relationship of these two place names. That is, the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires the inclusion relationship “disjoint”. Further, the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 uses the map information in the map information storage unit 10 to indicate that “Fukuoka” and “Oita” are “narrow areas” narrower than the threshold, and “far” that is far from the threshold. Assume that you have made a decision. That is, the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires spatial relationship information “disjoint-f (narrow region)”.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires a map including “Fukuoka” and “Oita” according to the explanation pattern “route explanation” corresponding to “disjoint-f (narrow area)”.
  • the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 searches for a route from “Fukuoka” to “Oita” and acquires route information.
  • the program supplementary information acquisition part 25 acquires sequentially the street view of each point corresponding to the said route information.
  • the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs a map including “Fukuoka” and “Oita”, and outputs a route search from “Fukuoka” to “Oita” on the map (see 1307).
  • the program auxiliary information output unit 26 sequentially outputs the street view of each point corresponding to the route information so as to indicate the route from “Fukuoka” to “Oita” (see 1308).
  • the scene determination unit 22 detects that 15 seconds or more have elapsed since the acquisition of the previous point information “Oita”, and determines that the scene has been switched.
  • the key information acquisition unit 21 acquires the point information “Jien no Taki”. Then, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 and the like perform the performance of “Jien no Taki” alone. That is, the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires a map including “Citizen Falls”. Then, the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs the map. Further, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires a picture of “Citizen Falls”. And the program supplementary information output part 26 outputs the said photograph.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 determines that “Oita” is “Oita city”.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires the inclusion relationship “disjoint” in “Oita” and “Yufuin Station”.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 uses the map information stored in the map information storage unit 10, and “Oita” and “Yufuin Station” are “narrow areas” narrower than the threshold and “near” a distance wider than the threshold.
  • the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires spatial relation information “disjoint-n (narrow region)”.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires a map including “Oita” and “Yufuin Station” according to the explanation pattern “route explanation” corresponding to “disjoint-n (narrow area)”.
  • the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 searches for a route from “Oita” to “Yufuin Station” and acquires route information.
  • the program supplementary information acquisition part 25 acquires sequentially the street view of each point corresponding to the said route information.
  • the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs a map including “Oita” and “Yufuin Station”, and outputs a route search from “Oita” to “Yufuin Station” on the map (see 1311).
  • the program auxiliary information output unit 26 sequentially outputs the street view of each point corresponding to the route information so as to indicate the route from “Oita” to “Yufuin Station” (see 1312).
  • the key information acquisition unit 21 acquires key information “Mt.
  • the scene determination unit 22 determines that no scene change has occurred. This is because it has not passed more than 15 seconds since the appearance of “Yufuin Station”.
  • the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 detects an inclusion relationship of “Yufuin Station” disjoint “Mt.
  • the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 uses the map information in the map information storage unit 10, and “Yufuin Station” and “Mt. Kanai” are “narrow areas” that are narrower than the threshold, and a distance that is wider than the threshold is “close” ”. That is, the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires spatial relation information “disjoint-n (narrow region)”.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires a map including “Yufuin Station” and “Mt. Kanai” according to the explanation pattern “route explanation” corresponding to “disjoint-n (narrow area)”. Further, the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 searches for a route from “Yufuin Station” to “Mt. Moreover, the program supplementary information acquisition part 25 acquires sequentially the street view of each point corresponding to the said route information. Then, the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs a map including “Yufuin Station” and “Mt. Kanai”, and outputs a route search from “Yufuin Station” to “Mt. Mt. Arai” on the map (see 1313). Further, the program auxiliary information output unit 26 sequentially outputs the street view of each point corresponding to the route information so as to indicate the route from “Yufuin Station” to “Mt.
  • the key information acquisition unit 21 acquires key information “Kyushu”.
  • the scene determination unit 22 determines that a scene change has occurred.
  • the program supplementary information acquisition part 25 grade
  • the key information acquisition unit 21 acquires key information “Fukuoka”.
  • the scene determination unit 22 determines that no scene change has occurred.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires the spatial relationship information “contains” between “Kyushu” and “Fukuoka”.
  • the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires a map of “Fukuoka” according to the explanation pattern “point explanation (2)” corresponding to the spatial relation information “contains”.
  • the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs map information for zooming in from the “Kyushu” area to the “Fukuoka” area (see 1315 in FIG. 13H).
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires a photograph using “Fukuoka” as a key. And the program supplementary information output part 26 outputs the photograph of the said "Fukuoka” (refer 1316 of FIG.13 (h)).
  • the key information acquisition unit 21 acquires key information “Kagoshima”.
  • the scene determination unit 22 determines that no scene change has occurred.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires the inclusion relationship “disjoint” between “Fukuoka” and “Kagoshima”.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 uses the map information in the map information storage unit 10 to indicate that “Fukuoka” and “Kagoshima” are “narrow areas” that are narrower than the threshold, and “far” that is far from the threshold. Assume that you have made a decision. That is, the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires spatial relationship information “disjoint-f (narrow region)”.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires a map including “Fukuoka” and “Kagoshima” according to the explanation pattern “route explanation” corresponding to “disjoint-f (narrow area)”.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 searches for a route from “Fukuoka” to “Kagoshima” and acquires route information.
  • the program supplementary information acquisition part 25 acquires sequentially the street view of each point corresponding to the said route information.
  • the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs a map including “Fukuoka” and “Kagoshima”, and outputs a route search from “Fukuoka” to “Kagoshima” on the map (FIG. 13 (i)). 1317).
  • the program auxiliary information output unit 26 sequentially outputs the street view of each point corresponding to the route information so as to indicate the route from “Fukuoka” to “Kagoshima” (see 1318 in FIG. 13I).
  • the key information acquisition unit 21 acquires key information “Kaegyogawa Station”.
  • the scene determination unit 22 determines that a scene change has occurred. This is because it has been over 15 seconds since the previous place name “Kagoshima” appeared.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 or the like performs an effect for “Kaegyogawa Station” alone. That is, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires a map including “Kaegyogawa Station”, and the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs the map (see 1319 in FIG. 13J). Further, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires a photograph using “Kaegyogawa Station” as a key, and the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs the photograph (see 1320 in FIG. 13J).
  • program auxiliary information for assisting a program being output. More specifically, according to the present embodiment, street view, map information, a photograph, and the like can be appropriately output in order to improve understanding of point information that appears in the program being output.
  • the output mode of the program auxiliary information may be changed according to the genre of the program being output. For example, when the genre of the program is “news”, it is preferable to narrow the output area of the program and widen the output area of the program auxiliary information as compared with the case of other genres. Further, for example, when the genre of the program is “news”, the street view may not be displayed, the map information or / and the photograph may be displayed, and the street view may be displayed when the genre is other genres.
  • the change in the output mode of the program auxiliary information includes a change in layout, a change in the type of program auxiliary information to be output, and the like.
  • two or more types of program auxiliary information for assisting the program being output can be appropriately output.
  • the program auxiliary information output unit 26 when two or more types of program auxiliary information have an output priority, and the program auxiliary information output unit 26 cannot output one type of program auxiliary information, other types of program auxiliary information are output. It is preferable to output information. For example, when the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 cannot acquire the street view for the acquired point information, it is preferable that the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs the photo for the point information. . In such a case, street view has a higher priority than photographs.
  • the type of program auxiliary information to be output may be changed using the moving means information, or the output mode (for example, layout, output time, etc.) of the program auxiliary information may be changed.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires the route of the route from the departure station to the end station, and the program auxiliary information output unit 26 acquires the information of the route. Also good.
  • the software that realizes the information processing apparatus 2 in the present embodiment is the following program. That is, this program is information related to the program being output from the computer, and the program-related information receiving unit that receives program-related information including one or more key information and the program-related information receiving unit receive the program.
  • a key information acquisition unit that acquires one or more key information that is a term belonging to a predetermined category from the program-related information, and information corresponding to the key information acquired by the key information acquisition unit,
  • This is a program for functioning as a program auxiliary information acquisition unit that acquires program auxiliary information that is information that supplements the content of a program, and a program auxiliary information output unit that outputs program auxiliary information acquired by the program auxiliary information acquisition unit. .
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit can acquire two or more types of program auxiliary information
  • the program auxiliary information output unit includes one or more types of the two or more types of program auxiliary information.
  • a program that causes a computer to function as the program auxiliary information is suitable.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit is a program that causes a computer to function as a device for acquiring different types of program auxiliary information according to the relationship between two or more key information.
  • the key information is point information that is a term belonging to the category of the point
  • the program auxiliary information is a program that causes the computer to function as including point-related information that is information about the point. That is preferred.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit acquires spatial relationship information indicating a spatial relationship between two or more pieces of point information acquired by the key information acquisition unit, and uses the spatial relationship information.
  • the program is a program that causes a computer to function as continuously acquiring two or more pieces of program auxiliary information.
  • the computer is further caused to function as a scene determination unit for determining a scene change in the program
  • the program auxiliary information output unit is configured to display a program at the time of the scene change determined by the scene determination unit. It is preferable that the program functions as a computer that does not continuously output auxiliary information.
  • the point-related information is preferably a program that causes a computer to function as including one or more types of information among a point photo, a point street view, and a point map information. is there.
  • the location-related information includes a street view of the location, the two or more types of program auxiliary information have an output priority, and the program auxiliary information output unit is acquired by the key information acquisition unit.
  • the program allows the computer to function as another type of program auxiliary information corresponding to the key information acquired by the key information acquisition unit. It is.
  • the computer may further function as a program type acquisition unit that acquires the type of the program, and the program auxiliary information output unit changes a type of program auxiliary information to be output according to the type, or
  • a program for changing the output mode of the program auxiliary information a program that causes a computer to function is preferable.
  • the key information acquisition unit acquires two or more key information from the program related information received by the program related information reception unit, and uses the two or more key information, Further functioning as a moving means information acquisition unit for acquiring moving means information indicating the type of moving means used in the program, the program auxiliary information output unit outputs program auxiliary information according to the moving means information.
  • the program is a program that causes a computer to function as a mode change.
  • the computer is further caused to function as a program receiving unit that receives a program and a program output unit that outputs a program received by the program receiving unit, and the program auxiliary information output unit outputs the program auxiliary information
  • the program to be output together with the program is a program that causes a computer to function.
  • Embodiment 3 an information processing apparatus that acquires one or more key information from program-related information and outputs program auxiliary information using the one or more key information will be described.
  • the key information here is other than the point information, for example, a performer. That is, the difference from the second embodiment is that program auxiliary information is acquired using key information other than the point information.
  • FIG. 14 is a block diagram of the information processing apparatus 3 in the present embodiment.
  • the information processing apparatus 3 includes a receiving unit 12, a program receiving unit 13, a program related information receiving unit 14, a program output unit 15, a key information acquisition unit 31, a program auxiliary information acquisition unit 32, and a program auxiliary information output unit 26.
  • the key information acquisition unit 31 acquires one or more key information, which are terms belonging to a predetermined category, from the program related information received by the program related information receiving unit 14.
  • the category is, for example, the name of a person (usually the name of a performer, the name of a person taken up in a program, etc.).
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 32 is information corresponding to the key information acquired by the key information acquisition unit 31, and acquires program auxiliary information that is information supplementing the content of the program.
  • the program auxiliary information is person-related information that is information about a person.
  • the program auxiliary information is, for example, a photograph about the person and the person's blog.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 32 may acquire two or more types of program auxiliary information.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 32 may acquire a photograph using two or more person-related information acquired by the key information acquisition unit 31.
  • the program supplementary information acquisition unit 32 may acquire a photograph in which all the persons are shown using two or more person names acquired by the key information acquisition unit 31.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 32 may search for photos from a set of photos stored in a recording medium (not shown). In such a case, the attribute of the person being photographed is added to the photograph.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 32 may search for photos on the Web using one or more key information acquired by the key information acquisition unit 31 as a key.
  • the key information acquisition unit 31 and the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 32 can be usually realized by an MPU, a memory, or the like.
  • the processing procedure of the key information acquisition unit 31 is usually realized by software, and the software is recorded on a recording medium such as a ROM. However, it may be realized by hardware (dedicated circuit).
  • Step S1501 The key information acquisition unit 31 acquires one or more person-related information from the program-related information. Here, there may be a case where the person-related information cannot be acquired. If the person related information cannot be acquired, the process returns to step S201.
  • Step S1502 The program auxiliary information acquisition unit 32 acquires the program auxiliary information using one or more person-related information acquired in step S1501.
  • Step S1503 The program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs the program auxiliary information acquired in step S1502. The process returns to step S201.
  • Step S1504 The program auxiliary information acquisition unit 32 acquires program auxiliary information corresponding to the instructed key information.
  • Step S1505 The program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs the program auxiliary information acquired in step S1504. Return to step S201
  • step S1502 of FIG. 15 it is suitable for the program supplementary information acquisition part 32 to acquire program supplementary information using two or more person relevant information.
  • the program supplementary information acquisition unit 32 acquires a photograph showing two or more people using two or more names.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 32 acquires the program auxiliary information using two or more person-related information in one scene.
  • the information processing apparatus 3 includes a scene determination unit 22.
  • the process is ended by powering off or interruption for aborting the process.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 32 acquires the performer identifier of the program being output from the electronic program guide, and acquires the performer's photo and blog using the performer identifier as a key. Also good.
  • the information processing apparatus 3 includes the electronic program guide storage unit 20 as with the information processing apparatus 2.
  • the software that implements the information processing apparatus 3 in the present embodiment is the following program. That is, this program is information related to the program being output from the computer, and the program-related information receiving unit that receives program-related information including one or more key information and the program-related information receiving unit receive the program.
  • a key information acquisition unit that acquires one or more key information that is a term belonging to a predetermined category from the program-related information, and information corresponding to the key information acquired by the key information acquisition unit,
  • This is a program for functioning as a program auxiliary information acquisition unit that acquires program auxiliary information that is information that supplements the content of a program, and a program auxiliary information output unit that outputs program auxiliary information acquired by the program auxiliary information acquisition unit.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit can acquire two or more types of program auxiliary information
  • the program auxiliary information output unit includes one or more types of the two or more types of program auxiliary information.
  • a program that causes a computer to function as the program auxiliary information is suitable.
  • the program auxiliary information acquisition unit is a program that causes a computer to function as a device for acquiring different types of program auxiliary information according to the relationship between two or more key information.
  • the key information is personal name information that is a term belonging to a personal name category
  • the program auxiliary information is a program that causes a computer to function as including person-related information that is information about a person. That is preferred.
  • the computer is further caused to function as a program receiving unit that receives a program and a program output unit that outputs a program received by the program receiving unit, and the program auxiliary information output unit outputs the program auxiliary information
  • the program to be output together with the program is a program that causes a computer to function.
  • the above-described embodiment is that program auxiliary information for assisting a program being output by the program output device can be output to a device different from the program output device.
  • an information processing system capable of outputting program auxiliary information for assisting a program being output by the program output device to the remote controller of the program output device will be described.
  • FIG. 16 is a conceptual diagram of the information processing system 3 in the present embodiment.
  • the information processing system 3 includes a program output device 31 and an information processing device 32.
  • the program output device 31 is a so-called television receiver.
  • the information processing device 32 outputs the program auxiliary information, but does not output the program.
  • the information processing device 32 has a function of a remote control of the television receiver here, but may not have a function of the remote control.
  • FIG. 17 is a block diagram of the information processing system 3 in the present embodiment.
  • the program output device 31 constituting the information processing system 3 includes a control signal receiving unit 311, a control unit 312, a program receiving unit 13, and a program output unit 15.
  • the information processing device 32 includes a map information storage unit 10, an electronic program guide storage unit 20, an instruction reception unit 321, a control signal transmission unit 322, a channel number acquisition unit 323, a program related information reception unit 14, a key information acquisition unit 31, a scene A determination unit 22, a program type acquisition unit 23, a moving means information acquisition unit 24, a program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25, and a program auxiliary information output unit 26 are provided.
  • the control signal receiving unit 311 constituting the program output device 31 receives the control signal.
  • the control signal receiving unit 311 normally receives a control signal from the information processing device 32.
  • the control signal is a signal for controlling the program output device 31 and is a signal for instructing channel change, volume up, volume down, power on, power off, and the like.
  • the control signal receiving unit 311 is usually realized by wireless communication means using infrared rays or the like.
  • the control unit 312 controls the program output device 31 in accordance with the control signal received by the control signal receiving unit 311.
  • the control unit 312 can usually be realized by an MPU, a memory, or the like.
  • the processing procedure of the control unit 312 is usually realized by software, and the software is recorded in a recording medium such as a ROM. However, it may be realized by hardware (dedicated circuit).
  • the instruction receiving unit 321 configuring the information processing apparatus 32 receives an instruction for controlling the program output apparatus 31 from the user.
  • the instructions include, for example, a channel change instruction, a volume up instruction, a volume down instruction, a power on instruction, a power off instruction, and the like.
  • the control signal transmission unit 322 transmits a control signal to the program output device 31 in accordance with the instruction received by the instruction reception unit 321.
  • the control signal transmission unit 322 is usually realized by a wireless communication means using infrared rays or the like.
  • the channel number acquisition unit 323 acquires the channel number of the program being output.
  • the channel number acquisition unit 323 normally acquires a channel number corresponding to the channel change instruction received by the instruction reception unit 321.
  • the channel number acquisition unit 323 can be usually realized by an MPU, a memory, or the like.
  • the processing procedure of the channel number acquisition unit 323 is usually realized by software, and the software is recorded on a recording medium such as a ROM. However, it may be realized by hardware (dedicated circuit).
  • Step S1801 It is determined whether or not the instruction received by the instruction receiving unit 321 is a control instruction for the program output device 31. If it is a control instruction, the process goes to step S1802, and if it is not a control instruction, the process goes to step S705.
  • Step S1802 The control signal transmission unit 322 transmits a control signal corresponding to the control instruction to the program output device 31.
  • the process returns to step S203.
  • program auxiliary information for assisting a program being output by the program output device 31 can be appropriately output to the remote controller of the program output device 31.
  • the software that implements the information processing apparatus 32 in the present embodiment is the following program. That is, this program is information related to the program being output from the computer, and the program-related information receiving unit that receives program-related information including one or more key information and the program-related information receiving unit receive the program.
  • a key information acquisition unit that acquires one or more key information that is a term belonging to a predetermined category from the program-related information, and information corresponding to the key information acquired by the key information acquisition unit,
  • This is a program for functioning as a program auxiliary information acquisition unit that acquires program auxiliary information that is information that supplements the content of a program, and a program auxiliary information output unit that outputs program auxiliary information acquired by the program auxiliary information acquisition unit. .
  • the computer is further caused to function as a channel number acquisition unit that acquires a channel number of the program, and the key information acquisition unit is assigned to a predetermined category from the program related information corresponding to the channel number.
  • the program is a program that causes a computer to function as one that acquires one or more key information that is a term to which the computer belongs.
  • the computer receives an instruction receiving unit that receives an instruction to control the program output device, and a control signal that transmits a control signal to the program output device according to the instruction received by the instruction receiving unit.
  • the instruction includes a channel change instruction
  • the channel number acquisition unit functions as a computer that acquires a channel number corresponding to the channel change instruction received by the instruction reception unit. It is preferable that the program is to be executed.
  • FIG. 19 shows the external appearance of a computer that executes the program described in this specification to realize the program receiving device, the information processing device, and the like according to the various embodiments described above.
  • the above-described embodiments can be realized by computer hardware and a computer program executed thereon.
  • FIG. 19 is an overview diagram of the computer system 300
  • FIG. 20 is a block diagram of the system 300.
  • the computer system 300 includes a computer 301 including a CD-ROM drive, a keyboard 302, a mouse 303, and a monitor 304.
  • the computer 301 includes an MPU 3013, a bus 3014 connected to the MPU 3013 and the CD-ROM drive 3012, a ROM 3015 for storing programs such as a boot-up program, and an MPU 3013. And a RAM 3016 for temporarily storing instructions of the application program and providing a temporary storage space, and a hard disk 3017 for storing the application program, the system program, and data.
  • the computer 301 may further include a network card that provides connection to a LAN.
  • a program that causes the computer system 300 to execute the functions of the information processing apparatus and the like of the above-described embodiment may be stored in the CD-ROM 3101, inserted into the CD-ROM drive 3012, and further transferred to the hard disk 3017.
  • the program may be transmitted to the computer 301 via a network (not shown) and stored in the hard disk 3017.
  • the program is loaded into the RAM 3016 at the time of execution.
  • the program may be loaded directly from the CD-ROM 3101 or the network.
  • the program does not necessarily include an operating system (OS) or a third-party program that causes the computer 301 to execute the functions of the information processing apparatus according to the above-described embodiment.
  • the program only needs to include an instruction portion that calls an appropriate function (module) in a controlled manner and obtains a desired result. How the computer system 300 operates is well known and will not be described in detail.
  • processing performed by hardware for example, processing performed by a modem or an interface card in the transmission step (only performed by hardware) Processing is not included.
  • the computer that executes the program may be singular or plural. That is, centralized processing may be performed, or distributed processing may be performed.
  • two or more communication means existing in one apparatus may be physically realized by one medium.
  • each process may be realized by centralized processing by a single device, or may be realized by distributed processing by a plurality of devices.
  • the information processing apparatus and the like according to the present invention have an effect of appropriately outputting program auxiliary information for assisting a program being output, and are useful as a television apparatus or the like.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Multimedia (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Databases & Information Systems (AREA)
  • Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
  • Two-Way Televisions, Distribution Of Moving Picture Or The Like (AREA)
  • Information Transfer Between Computers (AREA)
  • Navigation (AREA)

Abstract

[Problem] It was conventionally difficult to output, together with a program, spot-related information that is related to a spot appearing in the program. [Solution] A program reception apparatus, which can easily output, together with a program, spot-related information that is related to a spot appearing in the program, comprises: a program reception unit that receives a program; a program-related information reception unit that receives program-related information including one or more pieces of spot information; a program output unit that outputs the program received by the program reception unit; a spot information acquisition unit that acquires, from the program-related information received by the program-related information reception unit, the one or more pieces of spot information; a spot-related information acquisition unit that acquires one or more types of spot-related information that are information corresponding to and related to the spot information acquired by the spot information acquisition unit; and a spot-related information output unit that outputs, together with the program, the one or more types of spot-related information acquired by the spot-related information acquisition unit.

Description

番組受信装置、番組受信方法、および記録媒体Program receiving apparatus, program receiving method, and recording medium
　本発明は、番組に関連する情報を処理する番組受信装置等に関するものである。 The present invention relates to a program receiving apparatus for processing information related to a program.
　従来、地図表示可能なテレビ放送システムがあった（特許文献１参照）。かかるデジタル放送テレビは、番組中に位置情報を埋め込んでおき、テレビのリモコン操作によってその位置情報が地図サーバに送信され、地図サーバは該当部分の地図を選択しテレビに返送するようにする技術を有する。また、かかるデジタル放送テレビは、地図専門チャンネルを設置して、テレビのリモコン装置を使って地図を検索し、拡大や縮小も容易にできる地図サイトを構築する技術を有する。 Conventionally, there has been a television broadcasting system that can display a map (see Patent Document 1). Such digital broadcast television has a technology in which location information is embedded in a program, the location information is transmitted to a map server by a remote control operation of the television, and the map server selects a corresponding map and returns it to the television. Have. In addition, such digital broadcasting television has a technology for installing a map-specific channel, searching for a map using a television remote control device, and building a map site that can be easily enlarged or reduced.
特開２００８－２９５００１号公報JP 2008-295001 A
　しかしながら、従来技術においては、出力中の番組を補助する番組補助情報を適切に出力できなかった。 However, in the prior art, the program auxiliary information for assisting the program being output cannot be appropriately output.
　また、従来技術においては、番組に出現する地点の地図を出力するためには、番組中に位置情報を埋め込んでおく必要があり、放送方式の変更が必要であった。従って、従来の技術においては、番組と共に、地図等の地点関連情報を、容易に出力できなかった。 In addition, in the prior art, in order to output a map of points appearing in a program, it is necessary to embed location information in the program, and it is necessary to change the broadcasting system. Therefore, in the prior art, point related information such as a map cannot be easily output together with a program.
　また、従来の技術においては、ストリートビューを番組と共に出力できなかった。 Also, with the conventional technology, street view cannot be output together with the program.
　また、従来の技術においては、２以上の地点情報を用いて、地図やストリートビュー等の動きを出力できなかった。 Also, with the conventional technology, it was not possible to output movements such as maps and street views using information on two or more points.
　さらに、従来の技術においては、番組を出力する装置とは別の装置に、番組補助情報を出力できなかった。 Furthermore, in the prior art, the program auxiliary information cannot be output to a device different from the device that outputs the program.
　本第一の発明の情報処理装置は、出力中の番組に関連する情報であり、１または２以上のキー情報を含む番組関連情報を受信する番組関連情報受信部と、番組関連情報受信部が受信した番組関連情報から、予め決められたカテゴリーに属する用語である１または２以上のキー情報を取得するキー情報取得部と、キー情報取得部が取得したキー情報に対応する情報であり、番組の内容を補足する情報である番組補助情報を取得する番組補助情報取得部と、番組補助情報取得部が取得した番組補助情報を出力する番組補助情報出力部とを具備する情報処理装置である。 The information processing apparatus according to the first aspect of the present invention is information related to a program being output, and includes a program related information receiving unit that receives program related information including one or more key information, and a program related information receiving unit A key information acquisition unit that acquires one or more key information that is a term belonging to a predetermined category from the received program related information, and information corresponding to the key information acquired by the key information acquisition unit, It is an information processing apparatus provided with the program supplementary information acquisition part which acquires the program supplementary information which is the information which supplements the content of this, and the program supplementary information output part which outputs the program supplementary information which the program supplementary information acquisition part acquired.
　かかる構成により、出力中の番組を補助する番組補助情報を適切に出力できる。 With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately output program auxiliary information that assists the program being output.
　また、本第二の発明の情報処理装置は、第一の発明に対して、番組補助情報取得部は、２種類以上の番組補助情報を取得でき、番組補助情報出力部は、２種類以上の番組補助情報のうち、１または２種類以上の番組補助情報を出力する情報処理装置である。 Further, in the information processing apparatus of the second invention, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit can acquire two or more types of program auxiliary information, and the program auxiliary information output unit has two or more types of information. This is an information processing apparatus that outputs one or more types of program auxiliary information among the program auxiliary information.
　かかる構成により、出力中の番組を補助する２種類以上の番組補助情報を適切に出力できる。 With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately output two or more types of program auxiliary information that assists the program being output.
　また、本第三の発明の情報処理装置は、第二の発明に対して、番組補助情報取得部は、２以上のキー情報の関係に応じて、異なる種類の番組補助情報を取得する情報処理装置である。 Further, in the information processing apparatus of the third invention, in contrast to the second invention, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit acquires different types of program auxiliary information according to the relationship between two or more key information. Device.
　かかる構成により、出力中の番組を補助する２種類以上の番組補助情報を適切に出力できる。 With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately output two or more types of program auxiliary information that assists the program being output.
　また、本第四の発明の情報処理装置は、第二の発明に対して、２種類以上の番組補助情報に出力の優先順位があり、番組補助情報出力部は、一の種類の番組補助情報を出力できない場合に、他の種類の番組補助情報を出力する情報処理装置である。 In the information processing apparatus according to the fourth aspect of the present invention, two or more types of program auxiliary information have a priority of output with respect to the second invention, and the program auxiliary information output unit includes one type of program auxiliary information. Is an information processing apparatus that outputs other types of program supplementary information when it cannot be output.
　かかる構成により、出力中の番組を補助する２種類以上の番組補助情報を適切に出力できる。 With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately output two or more types of program auxiliary information that assists the program being output.
　また、本第五の発明の情報処理装置は、第一から第四いずれかの発明に対して、キー情報は、地点のカテゴリーに属する用語である地点情報であり、番組補助情報は、地点に関する情報である地点関連情報を含む情報処理装置である。 In the information processing apparatus according to the fifth aspect of the present invention, in any one of the first to fourth aspects, the key information is point information that is a term belonging to the point category, and the program auxiliary information is related to the point. This is an information processing apparatus including point-related information that is information.
　かかる構成により、出力中の番組を補助する地点関連情報を適切に出力できる。 With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately output point-related information that assists the program being output.
　また、本第六の発明の情報処理装置は、第五の発明に対して、番組補助情報取得部は、キー情報取得部が取得した２以上の各地点情報の空間的な関係を示す空間的関係情報を取得し、空間的関係情報を用いて、２以上の番組補助情報を連続して取得する情報処理装置である。 Further, in the information processing apparatus according to the sixth aspect of the present invention, in contrast to the fifth aspect, the program supplementary information acquisition unit is a spatial indicator that indicates a spatial relationship between two or more pieces of point information acquired by the key information acquisition unit. This is an information processing apparatus that acquires relationship information and continuously acquires two or more pieces of program auxiliary information using spatial relationship information.
　かかる構成により、出力中の番組を補助する地点関連情報を適切に出力できる。 With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately output point-related information that assists the program being output.
　また、本第七の発明の情報処理装置は、第六の発明に対して、番組におけるシーンの切り替わりを判断するシーン判断部をさらに具備し、番組補助情報出力部は、シーン判断部が判断したシーンの切り替わりの際には、番組補助情報の連続した出力を行わない情報処理装置である。 Further, the information processing apparatus according to the seventh aspect of the invention further comprises a scene determination unit for determining a scene change in the program with respect to the sixth invention, and the program auxiliary information output unit is determined by the scene determination unit. This is an information processing apparatus that does not continuously output program auxiliary information when scenes are switched.
　かかる構成により、出力中の番組を補助する地点関連情報を適切に出力できる。 With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately output point-related information that assists the program being output.
　また、本第八の発明の情報処理装置は、第四から第七いずれかの発明に対して、地点関連情報は、地点の写真、地点のストリートビュー、および地点の地図情報のうちの１種類以上の情報を含む情報処理装置である。 Further, in the information processing device according to the eighth aspect of the present invention, with respect to any one of the fourth to seventh aspects, the point related information is one type of a point photo, a point street view, and a point map information. An information processing apparatus including the above information.
　かかる構成により、出力中の番組を補助する地点関連情報を適切に出力できる。 With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately output point-related information that assists the program being output.
　また、本第九の発明の情報処理装置は、第八の発明に対して、地点関連情報は、地点のストリートビューを含み、２種類以上の番組補助情報に出力の優先順位があり、番組補助情報出力部は、キー情報取得部が取得したキー情報に対応するストリートビューが出力できない場合に、キー情報取得部が取得したキー情報に対応する他の種類の番組補助情報を出力する情報処理装置である。 Further, in the information processing apparatus according to the ninth aspect of the invention, in contrast to the eighth aspect of the invention, the point-related information includes a street view of the point, and two or more types of program auxiliary information have an output priority order. The information output unit outputs another type of program auxiliary information corresponding to the key information acquired by the key information acquisition unit when the street view corresponding to the key information acquired by the key information acquisition unit cannot be output. It is.
　かかる構成により、出力中の番組を補助する地点関連情報を適切に出力できる。 With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately output point-related information that assists the program being output.
　また、本第十の発明の情報処理装置は、第一から第九いずれかの発明に対して、番組の種類を取得する番組種類取得部をさらに具備し、番組補助情報出力部は、種類に応じて、出力する番組補助情報の種類を変える、または番組補助情報の出力態様を変える情報処理装置である。 The information processing apparatus according to the tenth aspect of the present invention further includes a program type acquisition unit that acquires the type of program, as compared with any of the first to ninth aspects, and the program auxiliary information output unit includes Accordingly, the information processing apparatus changes the type of the program auxiliary information to be output or changes the output mode of the program auxiliary information.
　かかる構成により、出力中の番組を補助する番組補助情報を適切に出力できる。 With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately output program auxiliary information that assists the program being output.
　また、本第十一の発明の情報処理装置は、第四から第十いずれかの発明に対して、キー情報取得部は、番組関連情報受信部が受信した番組関連情報から、２以上のキー情報を取得し、２以上のキー情報を用いて、番組内で使用している移動手段の種類を示す移動手段情報を取得する移動手段情報取得部をさらに具備し、番組補助情報出力部は、移動手段情報に応じて、番組補助情報の出力態様を変える情報処理装置である。 Further, in the information processing apparatus according to the eleventh aspect of the present invention, in contrast to any of the fourth to tenth aspects, the key information acquisition unit includes two or more keys from the program related information received by the program related information receiving unit. It further includes a moving means information acquiring unit that acquires information and acquires moving means information indicating the type of moving means used in the program using two or more key information, and the program auxiliary information output unit includes: This is an information processing apparatus that changes the output mode of program auxiliary information according to moving means information.
　かかる構成により、出力中の番組を補助する地点関連情報を適切に出力できる。 With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately output point-related information that assists the program being output.
　また、本第十二の発明の情報処理装置は、第一から第三いずれかの発明に対して、キー情報は、人名のカテゴリーに属する用語である人名情報であり、番組補助情報は、人に関する情報である人関連情報を含む情報処理装置である。 In the information processing apparatus according to the twelfth aspect of the present invention, the key information is personal name information that belongs to a personal name category, and the program auxiliary information is It is an information processing apparatus containing the person relevant information which is the information regarding.
　かかる構成により、出力中の番組を補助する人関連情報を適切に出力できる。 With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately output person-related information that assists the program being output.
　また、本第十三の発明の情報処理装置は、第一から第十二いずれかの発明に対して、番組を受信する番組受信部と、番組受信部が受信した番組を出力する番組出力部とをさらに具備し、番組補助情報出力部は、番組補助情報を番組と共に出力する情報処理装置である。 The information processing apparatus according to the thirteenth aspect of the present invention is the program receiving unit for receiving a program and the program output unit for outputting the program received by the program receiving unit, according to any of the first to twelfth aspects of the invention. The program auxiliary information output unit is an information processing apparatus that outputs the program auxiliary information together with the program.
　かかる構成により、出力中の番組を補助する番組補助情報を適切に出力できる。 With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately output program auxiliary information that assists the program being output.
　また、本第十四の発明の情報処理装置は、第一から第十二いずれかの発明に対して、番組を出力している番組出力装置とは別の装置であり、番組のチャネル番号を取得するチャネル番号取得部をさらに具備し、キー情報取得部は、チャネル番号に対応する番組関連情報から、予め決められたカテゴリーに属する用語である１または２以上のキー情報を取得する情報処理装置である。 Further, the information processing apparatus according to the fourteenth aspect of the invention is an apparatus different from the program output apparatus that outputs a program with respect to any of the first to twelfth aspects of the invention. An information processing apparatus further comprising a channel number acquisition unit to acquire, wherein the key information acquisition unit acquires one or more key information that is a term belonging to a predetermined category from program-related information corresponding to the channel number It is.
　かかる構成により、番組出力装置で出力中の番組を補助する番組補助情報を、番組出力装置とは異なる装置に適切に出力できる。 With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately output program auxiliary information for assisting a program being output by the program output device to a device different from the program output device.
　また、本第十五の発明の情報処理装置は、第十四の発明に対して、番組出力装置を制御するための指示を受け付ける指示受付部と、指示受付部が受け付けた指示に応じて、番組出力装置に制御信号を送信する制御信号送信部とをさらに具備し、指示は、チャネルの変更指示を含み、チャネル番号取得部は、指示受付部が受け付けたチャネルの変更指示に対応するチャネル番号を取得する情報処理装置である。 Further, the information processing apparatus of the fifteenth aspect of the invention is directed to the fourteenth aspect of the invention according to an instruction receiving unit that receives an instruction for controlling the program output device, and an instruction received by the instruction receiving unit, A control signal transmission unit that transmits a control signal to the program output device, the instruction includes a channel change instruction, and the channel number acquisition unit is a channel number corresponding to the channel change instruction received by the instruction reception unit Is an information processing apparatus for acquiring
　かかる構成により、番組出力装置のリモコンに、番組出力装置で出力中の番組を補助する番組補助情報を適切に出力できる。 With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately output program auxiliary information for assisting the program being output by the program output device to the remote controller of the program output device.
　また、本第十六の発明の番組受信装置は、番組を受信する番組受信部と、番組に関連する情報であり、１または２以上の地点情報を含む番組関連情報を受信する番組関連情報受信部と、番組受信部が受信した番組を出力する番組出力部と、番組関連情報受信部が受信した番組関連情報から１または２以上の地点情報を取得する地点情報取得部と、地点情報取得部が取得した地点情報に対応する情報であり、地点情報に関する情報である１または２種類以上の地点関連情報を取得する地点関連情報取得部と、地点関連情報取得部が取得した１または２種類以上の地点関連情報を、番組と共に出力する地点関連情報出力部とを具備する番組受信装置である。 The program receiving apparatus of the sixteenth aspect of the invention is a program receiving unit for receiving a program, and a program receiving unit for receiving program related information that is information related to the program and includes one or more pieces of point information. A program output unit for outputting a program received by the program receiving unit, a point information acquiring unit for acquiring one or more point information from the program related information received by the program related information receiving unit, and a point information acquiring unit Is information corresponding to the acquired point information, and is information related to the point information, one or more types of point related information acquisition unit for acquiring the point related information and one or more types acquired by the point related information acquisition unit It is a program receiving apparatus provided with the point relevant information output part which outputs the point relevant information of this with a program.
　かかる構成により、番組に出現する地点に関する地点関連情報を番組と共に容易に出力し、番組に出現する地点の理解を深くできる番組受信装置を提供できる。 With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a program receiving apparatus that can easily output point-related information regarding a point appearing in a program together with the program and deeply understand the point appearing in the program.
　また、本第十七の発明の番組受信装置は、第十六の発明に対して、地点関連情報取得部は、地点情報取得部が取得した２以上の地点情報を用いて、２以上の地点関連情報を連続して取得し、地点関連情報出力部は、地点関連情報取得部が連続して取得した２以上の地点関連情報を出力することにより、地点関連情報の動きを出力する番組受信装置である。 The program receiving apparatus according to the seventeenth aspect of the invention relates to the sixteenth aspect, in which the point-related information acquisition unit uses two or more point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit. The program receiving device that continuously acquires related information, and the point related information output unit outputs the movement of the point related information by outputting two or more point related information acquired continuously by the point related information acquisition unit. It is.
　かかる構成により、番組に出現する２以上の地点に関する２以上の地点関連情報を番組と共に容易に出力し、番組の中での地点の移動等をより深く理解できる番組受信装置を提供できる。 With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a program receiving apparatus that can easily output two or more point-related information relating to two or more points appearing in a program together with the program, and can deeply understand the movement of the point in the program.
　また、本第十八の発明の番組受信装置は、第十七の発明に対して、地点関連情報取得部は、地点情報取得部が取得した２以上の各地点情報の空間的な関係を示す空間的関係情報を取得し、空間的関係情報を用いて、２以上の地点関連情報を連続して取得し、かつ、取得した空間的関係情報に応じて、２以上の地点関連情報の取得方法が異なる番組受信装置である。 Further, in the eighteenth aspect of the program receiving device, in contrast to the seventeenth aspect of the invention, the point-related information acquisition unit indicates a spatial relationship between two or more pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit. A method for acquiring spatial relation information, continuously acquiring two or more spot related information using the spatial relation information, and acquiring two or more spot related information according to the acquired spatial relation information Are different program receiving apparatuses.
　かかる構成により、番組に出現する２以上の地点に関する２以上の地点関連情報を番組と共に容易に出力し、番組の中での地点の移動等をより深く理解できる番組受信装置を提供できる。 With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a program receiving apparatus that can easily output two or more point-related information relating to two or more points appearing in a program together with the program, and can deeply understand the movement of the point in the program.
　また、本第十九の発明の番組受信装置は、第十六から第十八いずれかの発明に対して、１または２種類以上の地点関連情報は、ストリートビューを含む番組受信装置である。 Also, the program receiving device of the nineteenth invention is a program receiving device in which one or more kinds of point related information includes a street view, in contrast to any of the sixteenth to eighteenth inventions.
　かかる構成により、番組に出現する地点に関するストリートビューを番組と共に出力し、番組では表現しにくい距離感や周囲の雰囲気をより伝えることができる番組受信装置を提供できる。 With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a program receiving apparatus that can output a street view regarding a point appearing in a program together with the program and can convey a sense of distance and surrounding atmosphere that are difficult to express in the program.
　また、本第二十の発明の番組受信装置は、第十九の発明に対して、地点関連情報取得部は、地点情報取得部が取得した２以上の地点情報を用いて、少なくとも一つの地点情報の位置を示す位置情報、および２以上の地点情報間の方角に関する方角情報を取得し、位置情報および方角情報を用いて、ストリートビューを取得する番組受信装置である。 The program receiving apparatus according to the twentieth aspect of the present invention is the program receiving apparatus according to the nineteenth aspect, wherein the point-related information acquiring unit uses at least one point using the two or more point information acquired by the point information acquiring unit. This is a program receiving apparatus that acquires position information indicating the position of information and direction information regarding a direction between two or more pieces of point information, and acquires a street view using the position information and the direction information.
　かかる構成により、番組に出現する地点に関するストリートビューを番組と共に出力し、番組では表現しにくい距離感や周囲の雰囲気をより伝えることができる番組受信装置を提供できる。 With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a program receiving apparatus that can output a street view regarding a point appearing in a program together with the program and can convey a sense of distance and surrounding atmosphere that are difficult to express in the program.
　また、本第二十一の発明の番組受信装置は、第二十の発明に対して、地点関連情報取得部は、位置情報を用いて、位置情報のカメラ映像を取得し、方角情報を用いて、取得したカメラ映像から方角情報が示す方角に対応するストリートビューを取得する番組受信装置である。 Further, in the program receiving device of the twenty-first invention, in contrast to the twenty-first invention, the point-related information acquisition unit acquires the camera image of the position information using the position information, and uses the direction information. Thus, the program receiving device acquires a street view corresponding to the direction indicated by the direction information from the acquired camera image.
　かかる構成により、番組に出現する地点に関するストリートビューを番組と共に出力し、番組では表現しにくい距離感や周囲の雰囲気をより伝えることができる番組受信装置を提供できる。 With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a program receiving apparatus that can output a street view regarding a point appearing in a program together with the program and can convey a sense of distance and surrounding atmosphere that are difficult to express in the program.
　また、本第二十二の発明の番組受信装置は、第十八から第二十一いずれかの発明に対して、１または２種類以上の地点関連情報は、ストリートビューを含み、地点関連情報出力部は、空間的関係情報を用いて、２以上の地点情報が示す２以上の地点を移動する態様で、ストリートビューを出力する番組受信装置である。 Also, in the program receiving device of the twenty-second aspect of the invention, with respect to any of the eighteenth to twenty-first aspects, the one or more types of point related information includes street view, and the point related information The output unit is a program receiving device that outputs a street view in a mode in which two or more points indicated by two or more point information are moved using spatial relationship information.
　かかる構成により、番組に出現する地点に関するストリートビューを番組と共に出力し、番組では表現しにくい距離感や周囲の雰囲気をより伝えることができる番組受信装置を提供できる。 With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a program receiving apparatus that can output a street view regarding a point appearing in a program together with the program and can convey a sense of distance and surrounding atmosphere that are difficult to express in the program.
　また、本第二十三の発明の番組受信装置は、第十六から第二十二いずれかの発明に対して、１または２種類以上の地点関連情報は、地図情報を含む番組受信装置である。 The program receiving apparatus according to the twenty-third invention is a program receiving apparatus according to any of the sixteenth to twenty-second inventions, wherein the one or more types of point related information includes map information. is there.
　かかる構成により、番組に出現する地点の地図を番組と共に容易に出力し、番組の理解を促進できる番組受信装置を提供できる。 With this configuration, it is possible to provide a program receiving apparatus that can easily output a map of points appearing in a program together with the program and promote understanding of the program.
　また、本第二十四の発明の番組受信装置は、第二十三の発明に対して、地点関連情報取得部は、地点情報取得部が取得した２以上の各地点情報の空間的な関係を示す空間的関係情報を取得し、空間的関係情報に対応する地図情報を取得し、地点関連情報出力部は、空間的関係情報に応じて、異なる態様で地図情報を出力する番組受信装置である。 The program receiving apparatus according to the twenty-fourth aspect of the invention relates to the twenty-third aspect of the invention, wherein the point-related information acquisition unit is a spatial relationship between two or more pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit. The spatial relation information is obtained, the map information corresponding to the spatial relation information is obtained, and the point related information output unit is a program receiving device that outputs the map information in a different manner according to the spatial relation information. is there.
　かかる構成により、番組に出現する地点の地図を番組と共に容易に出力し、番組の理解を促進できる番組受信装置を提供できる。 With this configuration, it is possible to provide a program receiving apparatus that can easily output a map of points appearing in a program together with the program and promote understanding of the program.
　また、本第二十五の発明の番組受信装置は、第二十四の発明に対して、地点関連情報出力部は、地点情報取得部が取得した２つの地点情報であり、第一の地点情報と第一の地点情報の後に受信された第二の地点情報との空間的関係情報に応じて、第一の地点情報に対応する地図情報を出力した後、第二の地点情報に対応する地図情報にズームインまたはズームアウトする態様で第二の地点情報を出力する番組受信装置である。 The program receiving apparatus according to the twenty-fifth aspect of the invention relates to the twenty-fourth aspect, wherein the point-related information output unit is two pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit, The map information corresponding to the first point information is output according to the spatial relationship information between the information and the second point information received after the first point information, and then corresponds to the second point information. It is a program receiver which outputs 2nd point information in the aspect which zooms in or out on map information.
　かかる構成により、番組に出現する地点の地図を番組と共に容易に出力し、番組の理解を促進できる番組受信装置を提供できる。 With this configuration, it is possible to provide a program receiving apparatus that can easily output a map of points appearing in a program together with the program and promote understanding of the program.
　また、本第二十六の発明の番組受信装置は、第二十五の発明に対して、地点関連情報出力部は、地点情報取得部が取得した２つの地点情報であり、第一の地点情報と第一の地点情報の後に受信された第二の地点情報との空間的関係情報に応じて、第一の地点情報が示す地点と第二の地点情報が示す地点とを含む地図情報を出力する番組受信装置である。 Also, in the program receiving device of the 26th invention, the point-related information output unit is two pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquiring unit, as compared with the 25th invention, and the first point Map information including the point indicated by the first point information and the point indicated by the second point information according to the spatial relationship information between the information and the second point information received after the first point information. This is a program receiving device to output.
　かかる構成により、番組に出現する地点の地図を番組と共に容易に出力し、番組の理解を促進できる番組受信装置を提供できる。 With this configuration, it is possible to provide a program receiving apparatus that can easily output a map of points appearing in a program together with the program and promote understanding of the program.
　本発明による情報処理装置によれば、出力中の番組を補助する番組補助情報を適切に出力できる。 The information processing apparatus according to the present invention can appropriately output program auxiliary information for assisting a program being output.
実施の形態１における番組受信装置１のブロック図Block diagram of program receiving apparatus 1 in the first embodiment 同番組受信装置１の動作について説明するフローチャートA flowchart for explaining the operation of the program receiving apparatus 1 同出力制御表を示す図Figure showing the same output control table 同出力例を示す図Figure showing the same output example 同出力例を示す図Figure showing the same output example 実施の形態２における情報処理装置２のブロック図Block diagram of information processing apparatus 2 according to Embodiment 2 同情報処理装置２の動作について説明するフローチャートA flowchart for explaining the operation of the information processing apparatus 2 同番組補助情報の取得処理について説明するフローチャートThe flowchart explaining the acquisition process of the program auxiliary information 同番組補助情報の出力処理について説明するフローチャートThe flowchart explaining the output processing of the program auxiliary information 同移動手段決定管理表を示す図The figure which shows the movement means decision management table 同出力制御表を示す図Figure showing the same output control table 同具体例における動作の概要を示す図The figure which shows the outline of the operation in the specific example 同画面遷移の例を示す図Diagram showing an example of the same screen transition 実施の形態３における情報処理装置３のブロック図Block diagram of information processing apparatus 3 according to Embodiment 3 同情報処理装置３の動作について説明するフローチャートA flowchart for explaining the operation of the information processing apparatus 3 実施の形態４における情報処理システム３の概念図Conceptual diagram of information processing system 3 in Embodiment 4 同情報処理システム３のブロック図Block diagram of the information processing system 3 同情報処理装置３２の動作について説明するフローチャートA flowchart for explaining the operation of the information processing apparatus 32 上記実施の形態におけるコンピュータシステムの概観図Overview of the computer system in the above embodiment 同コンピュータシステムのブロック図Block diagram of the computer system
　以下、情報処理装置等の実施形態について図面を参照して説明する。なお、実施の形態において同じ符号を付した構成要素は同様の動作を行うので、再度の説明を省略する場合がある。 Hereinafter, embodiments of the information processing apparatus and the like will be described with reference to the drawings. In addition, since the component which attached | subjected the same code | symbol in embodiment performs the same operation | movement, description may be abbreviate | omitted again.
　（実施の形態１）
　本実施の形態において、番組を受信し、番組に出現する地点の情報である地点情報を含む情報を受信し、当該地点情報を用いて、１種類以上の地点関連情報を取得し、番組と地点関連情報とを共に出力する番組受信装置について説明する。なお、ここでの地点関連情報は、例えば、ストリートビュー、地図情報、または地点情報のリスト等である。 (Embodiment 1)
In the present embodiment, a program is received, information including point information that is information on a point appearing in the program is received, one or more types of point-related information are acquired using the point information, and the program and the point A program receiving apparatus that outputs related information together will be described. The point-related information here is, for example, a street view, map information, or a list of point information.
　また、本実施の形態において、２以上の地点情報を用いて、地点関連情報の動きを出力する番組受信装置について説明する。 Also, in the present embodiment, a program receiving apparatus that outputs movement of point related information using two or more pieces of point information will be described.
　さらに、本実施の形態において、２以上の地点情報が示す領域の空間的な関係を示す空間的関係情報、または２以上の地点情報の出現の時間に関する時間的関係情報と空間的関係情報とを用いて、１種類以上の地点関連情報を取得し、番組と地点関連情報とを共に出力する番組受信装置について説明する。 Further, in the present embodiment, the spatial relationship information indicating the spatial relationship between the areas indicated by the two or more point information, or the temporal relationship information and the spatial relationship information regarding the time of appearance of the two or more point information. A program receiving apparatus that acquires one or more types of point-related information and outputs both the program and the point-related information will be described.
　図１は、本実施の形態における番組受信装置１のブロック図である。 FIG. 1 is a block diagram of a program receiving apparatus 1 in the present embodiment.
　番組受信装置１は、地図情報格納部１０、地点関連情報格納部１１、受付部１２、番組受信部１３、番組関連情報受信部１４、番組出力部１５、地点情報取得部１６、地点関連情報取得部１７、地点関連情報出力部１８を備える。 The program receiving device 1 includes a map information storage unit 10, a spot related information storage unit 11, a receiving unit 12, a program receiving unit 13, a program related information receiving unit 14, a program output unit 15, a spot information acquiring unit 16, and a spot related information acquiring. Unit 17 and point-related information output unit 18.
　地点関連情報取得部１７は、ストリートビュー取得手段１７１、地図情報取得手段１７２を備える。 The point related information acquisition unit 17 includes a street view acquisition unit 171 and a map information acquisition unit 172.
　地点関連情報出力部１８は、ストリートビュー出力手段１８１、地図情報出力手段１８２、地点情報出力手段１８３を備える。 The point related information output unit 18 includes a street view output unit 181, a map information output unit 182, and a point information output unit 183.
　なお、番組受信装置１は、いわゆるテレビジョン装置、番組受信機能を有するスマートフォン、番組受信機能を有するパソコン、番組受信機能を有するナビゲーション端末等であり、装置の種類は問わない。 The program receiving device 1 is a so-called television device, a smartphone having a program receiving function, a personal computer having a program receiving function, a navigation terminal having a program receiving function, etc., and the type of the device is not limited.
　番組受信装置１を構成する地図情報格納部１０は、地図情報を格納し得る。地図情報は、地図の情報である。地図情報は、通常、地点を示す１または２以上の地点情報を有する。地点情報は、地図上の領域や地点等の場所を特定する情報（例えば、地名や、都道府県名、市町村名、住所、建物名、ランドマーク名、駅名、道路名、店名、商店街名等）である。地点情報は、通常、地点を示す文字列であり、例えば、地名、名勝の名前等である。但し、地点情報は、コード番号等であっても良い。なお、地点情報は、地図上に表記されている地名等であることは好適である。 The map information storage part 10 which comprises the program receiver 1 can store map information. The map information is map information. The map information usually has one or more pieces of point information indicating points. Point information is information that identifies the location of a region or point on the map (for example, place name, prefecture name, city name, address, building name, landmark name, station name, road name, store name, shopping street name, etc. ). The point information is usually a character string indicating the point, and is, for example, a place name or a name of a scenic spot. However, the point information may be a code number or the like. The point information is preferably a place name or the like written on the map.
　また、地図情報は、通常、地図の画像である地図図柄情報を有している。地図図柄情報は、例えば、地図を構成するビットマップデータ（ラスタデータ）またはベクタデータ、またはこれらの組合せなどである。地図図柄情報のファイル形式は、ＧＩＦ形式やＪＰＥＧ形式や、ＰＮＧ形式等問わない。地図情報は、ＩＳＯのｋｉｗｉ地図データフォーマットであっても良い。なお、地図情報のデータ構造は問わない。 Also, the map information usually has map symbol information that is a map image. The map symbol information is, for example, bitmap data (raster data) or vector data constituting the map, or a combination thereof. The file format of the map symbol information is not limited to the GIF format, JPEG format, PNG format, or the like. The map information may be an ISO kiwi map data format. In addition, the data structure of map information is not ask | required.
　また、地図情報は、地点情報と、この地点情報が示す領域を示す座標群や、地点情報が示す地点を示す座標とを対応付けて有していても良い。また、地図情報は、例えば、地図の縮尺と対応付けて管理されていてもよい。具体的には、地図情報は、当該地図情報により出力される地図の縮尺の値の情報を有している。また、地図情報は、縮尺ごとに用意されていても良い。また、地図情報や、一の領域についての縮尺が異なる複数の地図図柄情報を有していてもよい。ここでの地図の縮尺とは、地図の縮尺の値を示す情報と考えても良い。また、地図情報は、道路情報を有していてもよい。道路情報は、地図が示す道路に関する情報である。また、地図情報は、いわゆるリンクデータやノードデータ等を有していても良い。また、地図情報は、その他の情報を有していても良い。 Further, the map information may have point information, a coordinate group indicating an area indicated by the point information, and coordinates indicating a point indicated by the point information in association with each other. The map information may be managed in association with the scale of the map, for example. Specifically, the map information has information on the scale value of the map output by the map information. Further, the map information may be prepared for each scale. Moreover, you may have several map symbol information from which the map information and the reduced scale about one area | region differ. The scale of the map here may be considered as information indicating the value of the scale of the map. The map information may have road information. The road information is information regarding the road indicated by the map. The map information may include so-called link data, node data, and the like. The map information may have other information.
　地点関連情報格納部１１は、１以上の地点関連情報を格納し得る。地点関連情報格納部１１は、地点関連情報を特定するための１以上の地点関連情報識別子を格納していても良い。地点関連情報格納部１１は、通常、地点情報と対応付けて、地点関連情報または地点関連情報識別子を格納し得る。なお、地点関連情報識別子は、地点関連情報へのリンクの情報、地点情報等である。地点関連情報の詳細については、後述する。なお、地点関連情報格納部１１に格納される地点関連情報は、通常、地点関連情報取得部１７が取得した地点関連情報である。地点関連情報は、番組の視聴を支援する情報である、と言える。また、地点関連情報は、番組を補足する情報である、とも言える。 The spot related information storage unit 11 can store one or more spot related information. The spot related information storage unit 11 may store one or more spot related information identifiers for specifying spot related information. The spot related information storage unit 11 can usually store spot related information or a spot related information identifier in association with the spot information. The point-related information identifier is information on a link to the point-related information, point information, or the like. Details of the spot related information will be described later. Note that the spot related information stored in the spot related information storage unit 11 is usually the spot related information acquired by the spot related information acquisition unit 17. It can be said that the location-related information is information that supports viewing of the program. Further, it can be said that the spot related information is information supplementing the program.
　受付部１２は、ユーザからの指示や情報を受け付ける。ここで、指示とは、例えば、出力されている地点情報に対する指示である。なお、例えば、この指示に対応する地点関連情報が出力される。指示や情報の入力手段は、リモコン、キーボード、マウス、タッチパネル、メニュー画面によるもの等、何でも良い。受付部１２は、リモコンやキーボード等の入力手段のデバイスドライバーや、メニュー画面の制御ソフトウェア等で実現され得る。 The accepting unit 12 accepts instructions and information from the user. Here, the instruction is, for example, an instruction for the output point information. In addition, for example, the spot related information corresponding to this instruction is output. An instruction or information input means may be anything such as a remote control, a keyboard, a mouse, a touch panel, and a menu screen. The receiving unit 12 can be realized by a device driver for input means such as a remote controller or a keyboard, control software for a menu screen, or the like.
　番組受信部１３は、番組を受信する。番組は、通常、テレビ番組である。番組受信部１３は、通常、図示しない放送装置から放送された番組を受信する。ただし、番組受信部１３は、インターネットを経由して送信された番組を受信しても良い。なお、番組は、通常、動画と音声とを有するが、動画のみでも良い。 The program receiving unit 13 receives a program. The program is usually a television program. The program receiving unit 13 normally receives a program broadcast from a broadcast device (not shown). However, the program receiving unit 13 may receive a program transmitted via the Internet. Note that a program usually includes a moving image and sound, but may include only a moving image.
　番組関連情報受信部１４は、番組に関連する情報であり、１または２以上の地点情報を含む番組関連情報を受信する。番組関連情報とは、通常、文字多重放送の文字情報である。但し、番組関連情報は、例えば、電子番組表、インターネット上の番組紹介のウェブページ等でも良い。ここで、受信とは、通常、番組と同期した、番組関連情報の受信である。 The program related information receiving unit 14 is information related to a program, and receives program related information including one or more point information. The program related information is usually text information of text multiplex broadcasting. However, the program related information may be, for example, an electronic program guide, a web page for introducing a program on the Internet, or the like. Here, reception is reception of program related information that is usually synchronized with a program.
　番組出力部１５は、番組受信部１３が受信した番組を出力する。ここで、出力とは、通常、ディスプレイへの表示と音出力、プロジェクターを用いた投影と音出力であるが、記録媒体への蓄積、他の処理装置や他のプログラムなどへの処理結果の引渡しなどを含む概念である。 The program output unit 15 outputs the program received by the program receiving unit 13. Here, output is usually display and sound output on a display, projection and sound output using a projector, but storage in a recording medium, delivery of processing results to other processing devices or other programs, etc. It is a concept that includes
　地点情報取得部１６は、番組関連情報受信部１４が受信した番組関連情報から１または２以上の地点情報を取得する。地点情報取得部１６は、例えば、地図情報格納部１０の地図情報が有する地点情報を用いて、番組関連情報から１または２以上の地点情報を取得する。つまり、地点情報取得部１６は、例えば、番組関連情報の中に含まれる名詞または名詞句であり、地図情報が有する地点情報に一致する名詞等を取得する。また、地点情報取得部１６は、例えば、地点情報の集合である地点辞書を保持しており、当該地点辞書を用いて、地点情報を取得しても良い。つまり、地点情報取得部１６は、例えば、番組関連情報の中に含まれる名詞または名詞句であり、地点辞書に格納されている地点情報に一致する名詞等を取得する。さらに、例えば、地点情報取得部１６は、例えば、番組関連情報を形態素解析し、地点を示す名詞または名詞句を取得しても良い。なお、形態素解析の技術は公知技術であるので、詳細な説明を省略する。 The point information acquisition unit 16 acquires one or more pieces of point information from the program related information received by the program related information receiving unit 14. The spot information acquisition unit 16 acquires, for example, one or more spot information from the program related information using the spot information included in the map information of the map information storage unit 10. That is, the spot information acquisition unit 16 acquires, for example, a noun or noun phrase included in the program-related information and matches a spot information included in the map information. Moreover, the point information acquisition part 16 hold | maintains the point dictionary which is a collection of point information, for example, and may acquire point information using the said point dictionary. That is, the spot information acquisition unit 16 acquires, for example, a noun or noun phrase included in the program-related information and matches the spot information stored in the spot dictionary. Further, for example, the spot information acquisition unit 16 may acquire a noun or a noun phrase indicating the spot by, for example, morphological analysis of the program related information. In addition, since the technique of morphological analysis is a well-known technique, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.
　地点関連情報取得部１７は、地点情報取得部１６が取得した１または２以上の地点情報を用いて、１または２種類以上の地点関連情報を取得する。地点関連情報とは、地点情報取得部１６が取得した地点情報に対応する情報であり、地点情報に関する情報である。地点関連情報は、例えば、ストリートビュー、地図情報、地点情報の集合、地点に関連する写真などである。 The point-related information acquisition unit 17 acquires one or more types of point-related information using the one or more point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit 16. The spot related information is information corresponding to the spot information acquired by the spot information acquisition unit 16 and is information related to the spot information. The spot related information is, for example, street view, map information, a set of spot information, a photograph related to the spot, and the like.
　地点関連情報取得部１７は、地点情報取得部１６が取得した２以上の地点情報を用いて、地点関連情報を取得することは好適である。この２以上の地点情報は、通常、連続して受信された２以上の地点情報である。また、この２以上の地点情報は、受信時刻の差が閾値以内の地点情報である。 It is preferable that the spot related information acquisition unit 17 acquires the spot related information using two or more pieces of spot information acquired by the spot information acquisition unit 16. The two or more pieces of point information are usually two or more pieces of point information received continuously. Further, the two or more pieces of point information are point information whose reception time difference is within a threshold value.
　地点関連情報取得部１７は、地点情報取得部１６が取得した２以上の地点情報のうち、予め決められた一部の地点情報のみを用いて、地点関連情報を取得することは好適である。例えば、地点関連情報取得部１７は、領域の範囲が一定以内の地点の地点情報のみを用いて、地点関連情報を取得することは好適である。領域の範囲が一定以内の地点は、例えば、金閣寺、龍安寺、神戸駅等は含むが、日本、京都、神戸等は含まない。また、地点関連情報取得部１７は、領域の範囲が一定以内の地点の地点情報であるかを判断するための情報（例えば、「都道府県は除く」「都道府県、市町村名は除く」など）を保持していても良いし、地図情報が有する地点情報に対応付けて、地点関連情報を取得するために使用するか否かを判断するためのフラグを有していても良い。なお、地点関連情報取得部１７は、このフラグを、ストリートビュー、地図情報等の地点関連情報の種類ごとに、かつ地点情報ごとに有していても良い。 It is preferable that the spot related information acquisition unit 17 acquires the spot related information using only a part of predetermined spot information among the two or more pieces of spot information acquired by the spot information acquisition unit 16. For example, it is preferable that the spot-related information acquisition unit 17 acquires the spot-related information using only spot information of spots whose area range is within a certain range. Points within a certain area range include, for example, Kinkakuji, Ryoanji, Kobe Station, etc., but do not include Japan, Kyoto, Kobe, etc. In addition, the point related information acquisition unit 17 is information for determining whether the area range is point information within a certain range (for example, “excludes prefectures”, “excludes prefectures and municipalities”). May be held, or a flag for determining whether or not to use the spot related information in association with the spot information included in the map information may be included. In addition, the point relevant information acquisition part 17 may have this flag for every kind of point relevant information, such as a street view and map information, and for every point information.
　また、地点関連情報取得部１７は、地点情報取得部１６が取得した２以上の地点情報を用いて、２以上の地点関連情報を連続して取得することは好適である。 Further, it is preferable that the spot related information acquisition unit 17 continuously acquires two or more spot related information using the two or more spot information acquired by the spot information acquisition unit 16.
　また、地点関連情報取得部１７は、空間的関係情報を取得し、当該空間的関係情報を用いて、２以上の地点関連情報を連続して取得することは好適である。なお、空間的関係情報とは、地点情報取得部１６が取得した２以上の各地点情報の空間的な関係を示す情報である。空間的関係情報は、例えば、地点情報取得部１６が取得した２つの地点情報が示す地点の領域の包含関係を示す情報、地点情報取得部１６が取得した２つの地点情報が示す地点間の距離に関する情報等である。空間的関係情報は、例えば、地点情報取得部１６が取得した２つの地点情報が示す２つの領域が包含関係にあることを示す情報、２つの地点情報が示す２つの領域が包含関係には無ことを示す情報、２つの地点情報が示す２つの領域が包含関係には無くかつ２つの地点情報が示す地点の距離が閾値より近いことを示す情報、または２つの地点情報が示す２つの領域が包含関係には無くかつ２つの地点情報が示す地点の距離が閾値より遠いことを示す情報等である。なお、地図情報を用いて、２つの地点情報（例えば、京都と金閣寺）の包含関係を示す情報を取得する技術は公知技術である。地点関連情報取得部１７は、例えば、２つの各地点情報の領域を示す位置情報（経度と緯度、または地図情報内の相対的な座標情報）を取得し、２つの地点が包含関係にあるか、包含関係に無いかを判断する。また、地図情報を用いて、２つの地点情報（例えば、京都と金閣寺）の距離を算出する技術は公知技術である。 Further, it is preferable that the spot related information acquisition unit 17 acquires spatial relation information and continuously acquires two or more spot related information using the spatial relation information. The spatial relationship information is information indicating a spatial relationship between two or more pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit 16. The spatial relationship information includes, for example, information indicating the inclusion relationship of the area of the point indicated by the two point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit 16 and the distance between the points indicated by the two point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit 16 It is information about. The spatial relationship information is, for example, information indicating that the two areas indicated by the two point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit 16 are in an inclusion relationship, and the two areas indicated by the two point information are not included in the inclusion relationship. Information indicating that the two areas indicated by the two point information are not in an inclusive relationship, and the information indicating that the distance between the points indicated by the two point information is closer than the threshold, or the two areas indicated by the two point information are Information indicating that there is no inclusive relation and the distance between the points indicated by the two pieces of point information is farther than a threshold. In addition, the technique which acquires the information which shows the inclusion relation of two point information (for example, Kyoto and Kinkakuji) using map information is a well-known technique. For example, the point-related information acquisition unit 17 acquires position information (longitude and latitude, or relative coordinate information in map information) indicating the areas of two pieces of point information, and whether the two points are in an inclusive relationship. Judge whether there is no inclusive relationship. A technique for calculating the distance between two pieces of point information (for example, Kyoto and Kinkakuji) using map information is a known technique.
　また、地点関連情報取得部１７は、地点情報取得部１６が取得した２以上の地点情報を用いて、少なくとも一つの地点情報の位置を示す位置情報、および２以上の地点情報間の方角に関する方角情報を取得し、当該位置情報および当該方角情報を用いて、ストリートビューを取得する。なお、地点情報取得部１６が取得した２以上の地点情報は、番組において出現する順序通りに、受信される、とする。そして、例えば、２つの地点情報のうち、まず地点Ａが受信され、次に地点Ｂが受信された場合、地点関連情報取得部１７は、地点Ａの位置情報（例えば、（緯度，経度））と地点Ｂの位置情報を取得する。そして、地点関連情報取得部１７は、地点Ａの位置情報と地点Ｂの位置情報とを用いて、地点Ａから地点Ｂへの方角を示す方角情報を取得する。なお、地点関連情報取得部１７は、地点情報から位置情報を取得する際に、通常、地図情報格納部１０の地図情報を用いるが、図示しない外部の地図サーバから位置情報を取得しても良い。そして、地点関連情報取得部１７は、地点Ａのストリートビューであり、方角情報が示す方角のストリートビューを取得する。なお、方角情報は、絶対的な方角を示す情報（例えば、北西、南南東等）でも良いし、相対的な方向等を示す情報でも良い。 In addition, the point related information acquisition unit 17 uses the two or more pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit 16 to use the position information indicating the position of at least one piece of point information and the direction related to the direction between the two or more pieces of point information. Information is acquired, and a street view is acquired using the position information and the direction information. It is assumed that two or more pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit 16 are received in the order in which they appear in the program. For example, when the point A is first received and the point B is received next, the point related information acquisition unit 17 is configured to obtain the position information of the point A (for example, (latitude, longitude)). And position information of point B are acquired. Then, the spot related information acquisition unit 17 acquires the direction information indicating the direction from the spot A to the spot B using the position information of the spot A and the position information of the spot B. The location-related information acquisition unit 17 normally uses the map information in the map information storage unit 10 when acquiring location information from the location information, but may acquire location information from an external map server (not shown). . Then, the point related information acquisition unit 17 acquires the street view of the direction indicated by the direction information, which is the street view of the point A. The direction information may be information indicating an absolute direction (for example, northwest, south-southeast, etc.) or information indicating a relative direction.
　さらに具体的には、例えば、地点関連情報取得部１７は、地点情報取得部１６が取得した２以上の地点情報のうちの、少なくとも一つの地点情報の位置情報を用いて、当該位置情報のカメラ映像を取得する。そして、地点関連情報取得部１７は、方角情報を用いて、取得したカメラ映像から方角情報が示す方角に対応するストリートビューを取得する。なお、地点関連情報取得部１７は、例えば、カメラ映像から方角情報が示す方角に対応する画像を切り出して、ストリートビューを取得する。なお、位置情報（例えば、（緯度，経度））を用いて、ストリートビューを取得する技術は公知技術である。また、位置情報と方角情報とを用いて、ストリートビューを取得する技術は公知技術である。 More specifically, for example, the point-related information acquisition unit 17 uses the position information of at least one piece of point information among the two or more pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit 16, and uses the position information camera. Get video. And the spot relevant information acquisition part 17 acquires the street view corresponding to the direction which direction information shows from the acquired camera image | video using direction information. In addition, the point relevant information acquisition part 17 cuts out the image corresponding to the direction which direction information shows from a camera image | video, for example, and acquires a street view. A technique for acquiring a street view using position information (for example, (latitude, longitude)) is a known technique. A technique for acquiring a street view using position information and direction information is a known technique.
　地点関連情報取得部１７は、地点情報取得部１６が取得した２以上の各地点情報の空間的な関係を示す空間的関係情報を取得し、当該空間的関係情報に対応する地図情報を取得することは好適である。 The point related information acquisition unit 17 acquires spatial relationship information indicating a spatial relationship between two or more pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit 16 and acquires map information corresponding to the spatial relationship information. That is preferred.
　ストリートビュー取得手段１７１は、地点情報取得部１６が取得した１または２以上の地点情報を用いて、１または２以上のストリートビューを取得する。ストリートビュー取得手段１７１は、地点情報取得部１６が取得した２以上の地点情報を用いて、２以上のストリートビューを連続して取得することは好適である。かかる処理により、２以上の地点間をストリートビューで移動する動作を出力できる。 The street view acquisition means 171 acquires one or two or more street views using the one or more point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit 16. It is preferable that the street view acquisition unit 171 continuously acquires two or more street views using the two or more pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit 16. By such processing, an operation of moving between two or more points in the street view can be output.
　ストリートビュー取得手段１７１は、空間的関係情報を取得し、当該空間的関係情報を用いて、２以上のストリートビューを連続して取得することは好適である。例えば、２つの地点情報の空間的関係情報が「２つの地点が包含関係に無く、かる２つの地点の距離が閾値以下であることを示す情報」である場合、ストリートビュー取得手段１７１は、２つの地点のストリートビューを順次、取得する。なお、順次取得されたストリートビューを用いて、２つの地点間を移動するように、ストリートビューが出力されることは好適である。 It is preferable that the street view acquisition unit 171 acquires the spatial relationship information, and continuously acquires two or more street views using the spatial relationship information. For example, when the spatial relationship information of the two point information is “information indicating that the two points are not in an inclusive relationship and the distance between the two points is equal to or less than a threshold value”, the street view acquisition unit 171 has 2 Get street view of two points sequentially. In addition, it is suitable that a street view is output so that it may move between two points using the sequentially acquired street view.
　地図情報取得手段１７２は、地点情報取得部１６が取得した１または２以上の地点情報を用いて、１または２以上の地図情報を取得する。地図情報取得手段１７２は、通常、地図情報格納部１０から地図情報を取得するが、図示しない外部の地図サーバから地図情報を取得しても良い。地図情報取得手段１７２は、地点情報取得部１６が取得した２以上の地点情報を用いて、２以上の地図情報を連続して取得することは好適である。かかる処理により、２以上の地点間の位置関係が明瞭に把握でき得る。 The map information acquisition unit 172 acquires one or more pieces of map information using one or more pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit 16. The map information acquisition unit 172 normally acquires map information from the map information storage unit 10, but may acquire map information from an external map server (not shown). It is preferable that the map information acquisition unit 172 continuously acquires two or more pieces of map information using the two or more pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit 16. By such processing, the positional relationship between two or more points can be clearly grasped.
　地図情報取得手段１７２は、空間的関係情報を取得し、当該空間的関係情報を用いて、２以上の地図情報を連続して取得することは好適である。例えば、２つの地点情報（地点Ａと地点Ｂ（地点Ａの出現後、地点Ｂが出現している場合））の空間的関係情報が「地点Ａが地点Ｂを包含する関係（Ｂ⊂Ａ）にあることを示す情報」である場合、地図情報取得手段１７２は、まず地点Ａに対応する地図情報を取得し、次に、ズームインする態様で、地点Ｂに対応する地図情報を取得する。そして、地点Ａに対応する地図情報が出力された後、地点Ｂに対応する地図情報が、ズームインする態様で出力される。 It is preferable that the map information acquisition unit 172 acquires the spatial relationship information and continuously acquires two or more pieces of map information using the spatial relationship information. For example, the spatial relationship information of two pieces of point information (point A and point B (when point B appears after point A appears)) is “relationship where point A includes point B (B⊂A) In the case of “information indicating that the information is present”, the map information acquisition unit 172 first acquires the map information corresponding to the point A, and then acquires the map information corresponding to the point B in a manner of zooming in. And after the map information corresponding to the point A is output, the map information corresponding to the point B is output in a manner of zooming in.
　また、例えば、２つの地点情報（地点Ａと地点Ｂ（地点Ａの出現後、地点Ｂが出現している場合））の空間的関係情報が「地点Ａが地点Ｂに包含される関係（Ａ⊂Ｂ）にあることを示す情報」である場合、地図情報取得手段１７２は、まず地点Ａに対応する地図情報を取得し、次に、ズームアウトする態様で、地点Ｂに対応する地図情報を取得する。そして、地点Ａに対応する地図情報が出力された後、地点Ｂに対応する地図情報が、ズームアウトする態様で出力される。 Also, for example, the spatial relationship information of two pieces of point information (point A and point B (when point B appears after point A appears)) is “a relationship where point A is included in point B (A In the case of “information indicating that it is in ⊂B)”, the map information acquisition means 172 first acquires the map information corresponding to the point A, and then zooms out the map information corresponding to the point B. get. And after the map information corresponding to the point A is output, the map information corresponding to the point B is output in a manner of zooming out.
　地点関連情報取得部１７は、地点情報取得部１６が取得した１または２以上の地点情報をそのまま取得しても良い。地点情報の取得処理は、何も行われなくても良い。地点関連情報取得部１７は、地点情報取得部１６が取得した２以上の地点情報の出現順序を明示する態様で、２以上の地点情報を含む地点関連情報を取得しても良い。なお、２以上の地点情報の出現順序を明示する態様とは、例えば、２以上の地点情報を、番組での出現順に矢印で繋ぐ態様である。２以上の地点情報の出現順序を明示する態様とは、例えば、「Ａ→Ｂ→Ｃ」である。かかる場合、例えば、旅の番組中に、番組の出演者が地点Ａから地点Ｂ、地点ＢからＣ地点に移動したことが明示される。 The point related information acquisition unit 17 may acquire one or more pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit 16 as they are. The point information acquisition process need not be performed. The spot related information acquisition unit 17 may acquire the spot related information including two or more pieces of spot information in a mode that clearly shows the order of appearance of the two or more spot information acquired by the spot information acquisition unit 16. In addition, the aspect which specifies the appearance order of 2 or more point information is an aspect which connects 2 or more point information with the arrow in the order of appearance in a program, for example. An aspect that clearly indicates the order of appearance of two or more pieces of point information is, for example, “A → B → C”. In such a case, for example, it is clearly shown that the performer of the program has moved from point A to point B and from point B to point C during the traveling program.
　地点関連情報出力部１８は、地点関連情報取得部１７が取得した１または２種類以上の地点関連情報を、番組と共に出力する。地点関連情報出力部１８は、地点情報取得部１６が取得した１または２以上の地点情報を出力しても良い。地点関連情報出力部１８は、２種類以上の地点関連情報を番組と共に出力することは好適である。地点関連情報出力部１８は、ストリートビューと地図情報とを番組と共に出力することは好適である。なお、地点関連情報出力部１８は、ストリートビューや地図情報等の地点関連情報を、番組と共に出力しないで、ユーザの切り替え指示等の受け付けにより、番組の出力を、地点関連情報の出力に切り替えても良い。 The point related information output unit 18 outputs one or more types of point related information acquired by the point related information acquisition unit 17 together with the program. The spot related information output unit 18 may output one or more spot information acquired by the spot information acquisition unit 16. The point related information output unit 18 preferably outputs two or more types of point related information together with the program. The point related information output unit 18 preferably outputs the street view and the map information together with the program. The point-related information output unit 18 does not output the point-related information such as street view and map information together with the program, but switches the output of the program to the output of the point-related information by receiving a user switching instruction or the like. Also good.
　なお、番組、ストリートビュー、地図情報、１以上の地点情報（地点情報のリスト）は、それぞれ異なるウィンドウに出力されることは好適である。なお、番組、ストリートビュー、地図情報等の出力対応を問わない。つまり、ＰｉｎＰの態様で、番組と地点関連情報とが出力されても良いし、画面を複数のウィンドウに区切り、複数の各ウィンドウに、番組と地点関連情報とが出力されても良い（タイル形式のウィンドウの態様）。例えば、番組の中の小ウィンドウに、ストリートビューや地図情報等が出力されても良い（ＰｉｎＰの態様）。 Note that it is preferable that the program, street view, map information, and one or more point information (list of point information) are output to different windows. It does not matter whether the program, street view, map information, etc. are output. That is, the program and the spot related information may be output in the PinP mode, or the screen may be divided into a plurality of windows, and the program and the spot related information may be output in each of the plurality of windows (tile format). Window aspect). For example, street view, map information, etc. may be output to a small window in the program (PinP mode).
　地点関連情報出力部１８は、地点関連情報取得部１７が連続して取得した２以上の地点関連情報を出力することにより、地点関連情報の動きを出力することは好適である。地点関連情報の動きとは、例えば、ストリートビューによる２以上の地点間の移動を示す出力、地図のズームイン、ズームアウトなどである。 It is preferable that the spot related information output unit 18 outputs the movement of the spot related information by outputting two or more spot related information continuously acquired by the spot related information acquisition unit 17. The movement of the point related information includes, for example, output indicating movement between two or more points by street view, zooming in and out of the map, and the like.
　地点関連情報出力部１８は、空間的関係情報を用いて、２以上の地点情報が示す２以上の地点を移動する態様で、ストリートビューを出力することは好適である。なお、ストリートビューによる２以上の地点間の移動を示す出力は、２以上の地点間の経路を分かりやすく提示することとなる。 It is preferable that the spot related information output unit 18 outputs the street view in such a manner that two or more spots indicated by the two or more spot information are moved using the spatial relation information. In addition, the output which shows the movement between two or more points by street view will present the route between two or more points in an easy-to-understand manner.
　地点関連情報出力部１８は、空間的関係情報に応じて、異なる態様で地図情報を出力することは好適である。なお、異なる態様とは、例えば、ズームイン、ズームアウト、移動等である。 It is preferable that the spot related information output unit 18 outputs the map information in a different manner according to the spatial relation information. The different modes include, for example, zoom in, zoom out, and movement.
　地点関連情報出力部１８は、地点情報取得部１６が取得した２つの地点情報であり、第一の地点情報と第一の地点情報の後に受信された第二の地点情報との空間的関係情報に応じて、第一の地点情報に対応する地図情報を出力した後、第二の地点情報に対応する地図情報にズームインまたはズームアウトする態様で第二の地点情報を出力することは好適である。例えば、２つの地点情報（地点Ａと地点Ｂ（地点Ａの出現後、地点Ｂが出現している場合））の空間的関係情報が「地点Ａが地点Ｂに包含されている関係にあることを示す情報」である場合、地点関連情報出力部１８は、地点Ａを示す地図情報を出力した後、ズームアウトしながら、地点Ｂを示す地図情報を出力する。なお、地点関連情報出力部１８は、地点Ａの地図情報を出力した後、地点Ｂの地図情報をズームアウトして出力することにより、番組で放送されている地点Ａが、地点Ｂの地域に含まれる地点であることを、分かりやすく提示できる。 The point related information output unit 18 is two pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit 16, and spatial relationship information between the first point information and the second point information received after the first point information. Accordingly, after outputting the map information corresponding to the first point information, it is preferable to output the second point information in such a manner that the map information corresponding to the second point information is zoomed in or out. . For example, the spatial relationship information of two pieces of point information (point A and point B (when point B appears after point A appears)) is “the point A is included in point B” In the case of “information indicating”, the point-related information output unit 18 outputs the map information indicating the point B while outputting the map information indicating the point A while zooming out. The point-related information output unit 18 outputs the map information of the point A, and then zooms out and outputs the map information of the point B, so that the point A being broadcast in the program is moved to the region of the point B. It is possible to show that it is a point included.
　また、例えば、空間的関係情報が「地点Ａに地点Ｂが包含されている関係にあることを示す情報」である場合、地点関連情報出力部１８は、地点Ａを示す地図情報を出力した後、ズームインしながら、地点Ｂを示す地図情報を出力する。なお、地点関連情報出力部１８は、地点Ａの地図情報を出力した後、地点Ｂの地図情報をズームインして出力することにより、番組で放送されている地点Ｂが、地点Ａの地域に含まれる地点であることを、分かりやすく提示できる。 For example, when the spatial relationship information is “information indicating that the point A is included in the point A”, the point-related information output unit 18 outputs the map information indicating the point A. The map information indicating the point B is output while zooming in. The point-related information output unit 18 outputs the map information of the point A, and then zooms in and outputs the map information of the point B, so that the point B being broadcast in the program is included in the area of the point A It is possible to show that it is a spot that can be read.
　地点関連情報出力部１８は、地点情報取得部１６が取得した２つの地点情報であり、第一の地点情報と第一の地点情報の後に受信された第二の地点情報との空間的関係情報に応じて、第一の地点情報が示す地点と第二の地点情報が示す地点とを含む地図情報を出力する。 The point related information output unit 18 is two pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit 16, and spatial relationship information between the first point information and the second point information received after the first point information. Accordingly, map information including the point indicated by the first point information and the point indicated by the second point information is output.
　ストリートビュー出力手段１８１は、地点関連情報取得部１７が取得したストリートビューを、番組と共に出力する。ストリートビュー出力手段１８１は、地点関連情報取得部１７が連続して取得した２以上のストリートビューを出力することにより、ストリートビューで移動している経路を出力することは好適である。ストリートビュー出力手段１８１は、空間的関係情報を用いて、２以上の地点情報が示す２以上の地点を移動する態様で、ストリートビューを出力することは好適である。 The street view output means 181 outputs the street view acquired by the point related information acquisition unit 17 together with the program. It is preferable that the street view output unit 181 outputs a route moving in the street view by outputting two or more street views acquired successively by the spot related information acquisition unit 17. It is preferable that the street view output unit 181 outputs the street view in such a manner that two or more points indicated by the two or more point information are moved using the spatial relationship information.
　地図情報出力手段１８２は、地点関連情報取得部１７が取得した地図情報を、番組と共に出力する。地図情報出力手段１８２は、地点関連情報取得部１７が連続して取得した２以上の地図情報を出力することにより、地図情報を用いた２以上の地点間の関係（例えば、包含関係）を出力することは好適である。 The map information output means 182 outputs the map information acquired by the spot related information acquisition unit 17 together with the program. The map information output means 182 outputs a relationship (for example, an inclusion relationship) between two or more points using the map information by outputting two or more map information continuously acquired by the point related information acquisition unit 17. It is preferable to do.
　地点情報出力手段１８３は、地点情報取得部１６が取得した１または２以上の地点情報を出力する。地点情報出力手段１８３は、番組における出現順で、２以上の地点情報を出力することは好適である。地点情報出力手段１８３は、例えば、番組における出現順で、２以上の地点情報を矢印で繋ぎ、当該２以上の地点情報を出力することは好適である。 The spot information output means 183 outputs one or more spot information acquired by the spot information acquisition unit 16. It is preferable that the point information output means 183 outputs two or more pieces of point information in the order of appearance in the program. For example, it is preferable that the point information output means 183 connects two or more pieces of point information with arrows in the order of appearance in the program, and outputs the two or more pieces of point information.
　地図情報格納部１０、地点関連情報格納部１１は、不揮発性の記録媒体が好適であるが、揮発性の記録媒体でも実現可能である。 The map information storage unit 10 and the spot related information storage unit 11 are preferably non-volatile recording media, but can also be realized by volatile recording media.
　地図情報格納部１０等に地図情報等が記憶される過程は問わない。例えば、記録媒体を介して地図情報等が地図情報格納部１０等で記憶されるようになってもよく、通信回線等を介して送信された地図情報等が地図情報格納部１０等で記憶されるようになってもよく、あるいは、入力デバイスを介して入力された地図情報等が地図情報格納部１０等で記憶されるようになってもよい。 The process in which map information etc. is memorize | stored in the map information storage part 10 grade | etc., Is not ask | required. For example, map information or the like may be stored in the map information storage unit 10 or the like via a recording medium, and map information or the like transmitted via a communication line or the like is stored in the map information storage unit 10 or the like. Alternatively, the map information or the like input via the input device may be stored in the map information storage unit 10 or the like.
　番組受信部１３、番組関連情報受信部１４は、通常、放送を受信する手段で実現されるが、無線または有線の通信手段で実現されても良い。 The program receiving unit 13 and the program related information receiving unit 14 are usually realized by means for receiving broadcasts, but may be realized by wireless or wired communication means.
　番組出力部１５、地点関連情報出力部１８は、ディスプレイやスピーカー等の出力デバイスを含むと考えても含まないと考えても良い。番組出力部１５は、出力デバイスのドライバーソフトまたは、出力デバイスのドライバーソフトと出力デバイス等で実現され得る。 The program output unit 15 and the spot related information output unit 18 may or may not include an output device such as a display or a speaker. The program output unit 15 may be implemented by output device driver software, or output device driver software and an output device.
　地点情報取得部１６、地点関連情報取得部１７は、通常、ＭＰＵやメモリ等から実現され得る。地点情報取得部１６の処理手順は、通常、ソフトウェアで実現され、当該ソフトウェアはＲＯＭ等の記録媒体に記録されている。但し、ハードウェア（専用回路）で実現しても良い。 The spot information acquisition unit 16 and the spot related information acquisition unit 17 can be usually realized by an MPU, a memory, or the like. The processing procedure of the point information acquisition unit 16 is usually realized by software, and the software is recorded in a recording medium such as a ROM. However, it may be realized by hardware (dedicated circuit).
　次に、番組受信装置１の動作について、図２のフローチャートを用いて説明する。 Next, the operation of the program receiving apparatus 1 will be described using the flowchart of FIG.
　（ステップＳ２０１）番組受信部１３は番組を受信したか否かを判断する。番組を受信すればステップＳ２０２に行き、番組を受信しなければステップＳ２０３に行く。 (Step S201) The program receiving unit 13 determines whether or not a program has been received. If a program is received, the process goes to step S202, and if no program is received, the process goes to step S203.
　（ステップＳ２０２）番組出力部１５は、ステップＳ２０１で受信された番組を出力する。番組出力部１５は、通常、番組を出力する領域に、番組を出力する。 (Step S202) The program output unit 15 outputs the program received in step S201. The program output unit 15 normally outputs a program to an area where the program is output.
　（ステップＳ２０３）番組関連情報受信部１４は、番組関連情報を受信したか否かを判断する。番組関連情報を受信すればステップＳ２０４に行き、番組関連情報を受信しなければステップＳ２１２に行く。 (Step S203) The program related information receiving unit 14 determines whether or not the program related information is received. If the program related information is received, the process goes to step S204, and if the program related information is not received, the process goes to step S212.
　（ステップＳ２０４）地点情報取得部１６は、ステップＳ２０３で受信された番組関連情報から、１以上の地点情報を取得する。 (Step S204) The spot information acquisition unit 16 acquires one or more spot information from the program related information received in Step S203.
　（ステップＳ２０５）地点関連情報出力部１８は、ステップＳ２０４で取得された１以上の地点情報を、地点情報のリストの領域（ウィンドウ）に出力する。また、地点関連情報出力部１８は、１以上の地点情報を、地点関連情報格納部１１に一時蓄積する。なお、地点関連情報出力部１８は、２以上の地点情報の、番組における出現順序が分かる態様で、２以上の地点情報を地点情報のリストの領域に出力することは好適である。 (Step S205) The point-related information output unit 18 outputs one or more pieces of point information acquired in step S204 to a region (window) of the point information list. The spot related information output unit 18 temporarily stores one or more pieces of spot information in the spot related information storage unit 11. In addition, it is preferable that the point-related information output unit 18 outputs two or more pieces of point information to the region of the point information list in a manner in which the appearance order of two or more pieces of point information can be understood in the program.
　（ステップＳ２０６）地点関連情報取得部１７は、地点情報の履歴を地点関連情報格納部１１から取得する。取得する地点情報の履歴（１以上の地点情報）は、例えば、現在時刻から閾値以内の時間前に出力された地点情報、または直前に出力された地点情報等である。なお、ここで、地点関連情報取得部１７は、地点情報の履歴を取得できない場合もある。 (Step S206) The point-related information acquisition unit 17 acquires the history of the point information from the point-related information storage unit 11. The history of the point information to be acquired (one or more pieces of point information) is, for example, point information output before a time within a threshold from the current time, or point information output immediately before. Here, the point related information acquisition unit 17 may not be able to acquire a history of point information.
　（ステップＳ２０７）地点関連情報取得部１７は、ステップＳ２０４で取得された１以上の地点情報、またはステップＳ２０４で取得された１以上の地点情報とステップＳ２０６で取得された地点情報の履歴とを用いて、２以上の地点情報の空間的関係情報を取得する。地点関連情報取得部１７は、通常、地図情報を用いて、２つの地点情報の空間的関係情報を取得する。 (Step S207) The spot related information acquisition unit 17 uses one or more spot information acquired in step S204, or one or more spot information acquired in step S204 and a history of spot information acquired in step S206. Thus, the spatial relationship information of two or more point information is acquired. The spot related information acquisition unit 17 usually acquires the spatial relationship information of the two spot information using the map information.
　（ステップＳ２０８）地点関連情報取得部１７は、ステップＳ２０４で取得された１以上の地点情報に対応するストリートビューを取得する。 (Step S208) The spot related information acquisition unit 17 acquires a street view corresponding to one or more spot information acquired in Step S204.
　（ステップＳ２０９）地点関連情報出力部１８は、ステップＳ２０８で取得されたストリートビューを、ステップＳ２０７で取得された空間的関係情報に応じた出力態様で、ストリートビューの領域に出力する。ここで、地点関連情報出力部１８は、地点情報に対応付けてストリートビューを地点関連情報格納部１１に一時蓄積することは好適である。また、ここで、地点関連情報出力部１８は、ストリートビューを出力した地点情報のみ、またはストリートビューを出力した地点情報に対応する位置情報（例えば、（緯度，経度））を、地点関連情報格納部１１に一時蓄積することは好適である。 (Step S209) The point-related information output unit 18 outputs the street view acquired in step S208 to the street view area in an output mode corresponding to the spatial relationship information acquired in step S207. Here, it is preferable that the spot related information output unit 18 temporarily stores the street view in the spot related information storage unit 11 in association with the spot information. Here, the point related information output unit 18 stores only the point information that outputs the street view or the position information corresponding to the point information that outputs the street view (for example, (latitude, longitude)). It is preferable to temporarily store in the unit 11.
　（ステップＳ２１０）地点関連情報取得部１７は、ステップＳ２０４で取得された１以上の地点情報に対応する地図情報を取得する。なお、地点情報に対応する地図情報とは、通常、地点情報で示される地点の領域がすべて含まれる縮尺の地図情報であり、地点情報から取得される位置情報（例えば、（緯度，経度））を中心とする地図情報である。ただし、地点情報に対応する地図情報とは、地点情報で示される地点の領域がすべて含まれる縮尺の地図情報であり、地点情報から取得される位置情報（例えば、（緯度，経度））を中心としないが、含まれている地図情報でも良い。また、地点情報に対応する地図情報とは、地点情報で示される地点の領域のすべてが含まれていない地図情報でも良い。 (Step S210) The spot-related information acquisition unit 17 acquires map information corresponding to one or more spot information acquired in Step S204. Note that the map information corresponding to the point information is usually map information on a scale that includes all of the region of the point indicated by the point information, and position information (for example, (latitude, longitude)) acquired from the point information. Map information centered on However, the map information corresponding to the point information is scaled map information that includes the entire area of the point indicated by the point information, and centered on position information (for example, (latitude, longitude)) acquired from the point information. However, the map information included may be used. Further, the map information corresponding to the point information may be map information that does not include the entire point area indicated by the point information.
　（ステップＳ２１１）地点関連情報出力部１８は、ステップＳ２１０で取得された地図情報を、ステップＳ２０７で取得された空間的関係情報に応じた出力態様で、地図情報の領域に出力する。ここで、地点関連情報出力部１８は、地点情報に対応付けて地図情報を地点関連情報格納部１１に一時蓄積することは好適である。なお、地点関連情報出力部１８は、地図情報を出力した地点の地点情報のみ、または地図情報を出力した地点情報に対応する位置情報（例えば、（緯度，経度））を、地点関連情報格納部１１に一時蓄積することは好適である。 (Step S211) The point-related information output unit 18 outputs the map information acquired in Step S210 to the area of the map information in an output mode corresponding to the spatial relationship information acquired in Step S207. Here, it is preferable that the location-related information output unit 18 temporarily stores map information in the location-related information storage unit 11 in association with the location information. The point related information output unit 18 uses only the point information of the point where the map information is output, or the position information (for example, (latitude, longitude)) corresponding to the point information where the map information is output, as the point related information storage unit. 11 is preferably stored temporarily.
　（ステップＳ２１２）受付部１２は、ユーザから指示を受け付けたか否かを判断する。指示を受け付けた場合はステップＳ２１３に行き、指示を受け付けない場合はステップＳ２０１に戻る。なお、ここでの指示は、出力されている地点情報への指示である、とする。 (Step S212) The receiving unit 12 determines whether an instruction has been received from the user. When the instruction is accepted, the process goes to step S213, and when the instruction is not accepted, the process returns to step S201. It is assumed that the instruction here is an instruction to the output point information.
　（ステップＳ２１３）地点関連情報取得部１７は、指示された地点情報を取得する。 (Step S213) The point related information acquisition unit 17 acquires the instructed point information.
　（ステップＳ２１４）地点関連情報取得部１７は、取得した地点情報に対応するストリートビューを、地点関連情報格納部１１から取得する。そして、地点関連情報出力部１８は、取得されたストリートビューを、ストリートビューの領域に出力する。ここで、地点関連情報取得部１７は、取得した地点情報に対応するストリートビューを、ステップＳ２０８と同じ処理により取得しても良い。 (Step S214) The spot related information acquisition unit 17 acquires a street view corresponding to the acquired spot information from the spot related information storage unit 11. Then, the point related information output unit 18 outputs the acquired street view to the area of the street view. Here, the spot related information acquisition unit 17 may acquire a street view corresponding to the acquired spot information by the same process as in step S208.
　（ステップＳ２１５）地点関連情報取得部１７は、取得した地点情報に対応する地図情報を、地点関連情報格納部１１から取得する。そして、地点関連情報出力部１８は、取得された地図情報を、地図情報の領域に出力する。ステップＳ２０１に戻る。ここで、地点関連情報取得部１７は、取得した地点情報に対応する地図情報を、ステップＳ２１０と同じ処理により取得しても良い。 (Step S215) The point-related information acquisition unit 17 acquires map information corresponding to the acquired point information from the point-related information storage unit 11. And the spot relevant information output part 18 outputs the acquired map information to the area | region of map information. The process returns to step S201. Here, the spot related information acquisition unit 17 may acquire the map information corresponding to the acquired spot information by the same process as in step S210.
　なお、図２のフローチャートにおいて、ストリートビュー、地図情報、地点情報のリストを出力したが、ストリートビュー、地図情報、地点情報のうちの１以上の地点関連情報を出力しても良い。 In the flowchart of FIG. 2, the list of street view, map information, and point information is output, but one or more point related information of street view, map information, and point information may be output.
　また、図２のフローチャートにおいて、受付部１２は、地点情報の指示以外の指示等を受け付けても良い。かかる場合、受付部１２が受け付けた指示等に対応する動作が行われる。 Further, in the flowchart of FIG. 2, the receiving unit 12 may receive an instruction other than the point information instruction. In such a case, an operation corresponding to the instruction received by the receiving unit 12 is performed.
　さらに、図２のフローチャートにおいて、電源オフや処理終了の割り込みにより処理は終了する。 Furthermore, in the flowchart of FIG. 2, the processing is ended by powering off or interruption for aborting the processing.
　以下、本実施の形態における番組受信装置１の具体的な動作について説明する。 Hereinafter, a specific operation of the program receiving apparatus 1 in the present embodiment will be described.
　今、番組関連情報は文字多重放送の文字列である。また、番組はテレビの番組である。 Now, the program-related information is a character string of text multiplex broadcasting. The program is a television program.
　そして、今、地点関連情報出力部１８は、図３に示す出力制御表を保持している。出力制御表は、ストリートビューまたは／および地図情報の出力態様を決定するための表であり、ストリートビューまたは／および地図情報の出力を制御するための表である。 And now, the spot related information output unit 18 holds the output control table shown in FIG. The output control table is a table for determining an output mode of street view or / and map information, and is a table for controlling the output of street view or / and map information.
　出力制御表は、２つの地点情報（ここでは、ＡとＢ）の包含関係、および距離をパラメータとして、地点関連情報の出力を制御するための表である。なお、２つの地点情報は、番組関連情報に含まれる地点情報であり、同時または時間的に閾値以内に受信された番組関連情報に含まれる地点情報である。また、番組のシーンの切り替えの情報を番組関連情報が有する場合、２つの地点情報は、同一のシーンにおける番組関連情報に含まれる地点情報である。 The output control table is a table for controlling the output of the spot related information using the inclusion relation between the two spot information (here, A and B) and the distance as parameters. Note that the two pieces of spot information are spot information included in the program-related information and are spot information included in the program-related information received within the threshold value simultaneously or temporally. In addition, when the program related information includes information on switching the program scene, the two pieces of point information are point information included in the program related information in the same scene.
　また、出力制御表において、行「包含関係」は、２つの地点情報（ＡとＢ）の各領域の包含関係を示す。また、行「距離」は、２つの地点情報（ＡとＢ）の距離が閾値以内か否かを示す。ここで、「閾値以内」を「閾値より小さい」、「閾値より大きい」を「閾値以上」としても良い。また、行「説明パターン」は、地点情報の説明のパターンを示す情報である。説明パターン「地点説明」は地点情報「Ｂ」の説明をすべきことを示し、説明パターン「地域説明」は地点情報「Ｂ」が示す地域の説明をすべきことを示し、説明パターン「経路説明」はＡからＢへの経路を説明すべきことを示し、説明パターン「比較説明」はＡとＢとを比較すべきことを示す。また、行「ストリートビュー制御」は、ストリートビューの制御に関する情報であり、「Ｂを出力」は地点情報「Ｂ」に対応するストリートビューを出力することを示す。また、「Ａ→Ｂ」は、地点情報「Ａ」に対応するストリートビューを出力し、地点情報「Ｂ」の地点に移動するように、地点情報「Ｂ」に対応するストリートビューを出力することを示す。また、「ＡとＢを出力」は、地点情報「Ａ」と地点情報「Ｂ」の、２つのストリートビューを出力することを示す。さらに、行「地図制御」は、地図情報の出力制御に関する情報であり、「地図情報」は出力する地図情報を示し、２以上の情報がある場合、２以上の地図情報を順次出力することを示す。また、「遷移方法」は２以上の地図情報の遷移方法を示す。さらに、「補助情報」は地図情報の上に出力すべき補助的な情報を示す。補助情報の「Ａ，Ｂ強調」は、地点Ａと地点Ｂとを強調することを示す。また、「経路強調」は地点Ａから地点Ｂへの経路を強調することを示す。地点Ａと地点Ｂの強調方法は、他の地点と比較して、異なる態様で、地点Ａと地点Ｂとが出力されれば良い。地点Ａと地点Ｂの強調方法は、例えば、地点Ａと地点Ｂにピンを立てる表示である。また、地点Ａと地点Ｂの強調方法は、例えば、地点Ａと地点Ｂの名称を他の名称と異なる色（例えば、赤）とすること等である。また、経路の強調とは、例えば、経路の線を、他の線と比較して太くする、色を変える等である。 Also, in the output control table, the line “inclusion relationship” indicates the inclusion relationship between the areas of the two point information (A and B). The row “distance” indicates whether or not the distance between the two pieces of point information (A and B) is within a threshold value. Here, “within threshold” may be “smaller than threshold”, and “greater than threshold” may be “greater than threshold”. The row “explanation pattern” is information indicating a description pattern of the spot information. The explanation pattern “point explanation” indicates that the spot information “B” should be explained, the explanation pattern “area explanation” indicates that the area indicated by the spot information “B” should be explained, and the explanation pattern “route explanation” "Indicates that the route from A to B should be explained, and the explanation pattern" comparison explanation "shows that A and B should be compared. The row “street view control” is information relating to the control of the street view, and “output B” indicates that the street view corresponding to the point information “B” is output. “A → B” outputs a street view corresponding to the point information “A”, and outputs a street view corresponding to the point information “B” so as to move to the point of the point information “B”. Indicates. “Output A and B” indicates that two street views of the point information “A” and the point information “B” are output. Furthermore, the line “map control” is information relating to the output control of map information, and “map information” indicates the map information to be output, and when there are two or more pieces of information, two or more pieces of map information are sequentially output. Show. The “transition method” indicates a transition method of two or more map information. Further, “auxiliary information” indicates auxiliary information to be output on the map information. The auxiliary information “A, B emphasis” indicates that the points A and B are emphasized. “Route emphasis” indicates that the route from point A to point B is emphasized. The point A and the point B may be emphasized by outputting the point A and the point B in a different manner as compared with other points. The method for emphasizing the points A and B is, for example, a display in which pins are set at the points A and B. Moreover, the highlighting method of the point A and the point B is making the name of the point A and the point B into a different color (for example, red) from other names, for example. Further, the route emphasis includes, for example, making a route line thicker than other lines, changing a color, and the like.
　また、出力制御表の第一列目（列「１」）は、地点情報（Ａ）が示す領域と地点情報（Ｂ）のが示す領域との包含関係が「Ａ⊃Ｂ」である場合であり、説明パターンが「地点説明」であることを示す。そして、列「１」は、ストリートビューＢを出力することを示す。また、列「１」は、地図情報Ａを出力した後、地図情報Ｂをズームインして出力することを示す。また、列「１」は、地図情報の地点Ａ、地点Ｂを強調する態様で出力することを示す。なお、ストリートビューＢは、地点情報「Ｂ」の地点のストリートビューである。地図情報Ａは、地点情報「Ａ」を含む地図情報であり、地点情報「Ａ」の地点に対応する地図情報である。 The first column (column “1”) of the output control table is when the inclusion relationship between the area indicated by the point information (A) and the area indicated by the point information (B) is “A⊃B”. Yes, indicating that the explanation pattern is “point explanation”. Column “1” indicates that street view B is output. The column “1” indicates that after the map information A is output, the map information B is zoomed in and output. The column “1” indicates that the points A and B of the map information are output in an emphasized manner. The street view B is a street view of the point of the point information “B”. The map information A is map information including the point information “A”, and is map information corresponding to the point of the point information “A”.
　また、出力制御表の第二列目（列「２」）は、地点情報（Ａ）が示す領域と地点情報（Ｂ）のが示す領域との包含関係が「Ａ⊂Ｂ」である場合であり、説明パターンが「地域説明」であることを示す。そして、列「２」は、ストリートビューＡを出力することを示す。また、列「２」は、地図情報Ａを出力した後、地図情報Ｂをズームアウトして出力することを示す。また、列「２」は、地図情報の地点Ａ、地点Ｂを強調する態様で出力することを示す。 The second column (column “2”) of the output control table is when the inclusion relationship between the area indicated by the point information (A) and the area indicated by the point information (B) is “A⊂B”. Yes, indicating that the explanation pattern is “region explanation”. Column “2” indicates that street view A is output. The column “2” indicates that after the map information A is output, the map information B is zoomed out and output. The column “2” indicates that the points A and B of the map information are output in an emphasized manner.
　また、出力制御表の第三列目（列「３」）は、地点情報（Ａ）が示す領域と地点情報（Ｂ）のが示す領域との包含関係がない場合であり、地点ＡとＢとの距離が閾値以内である場合であり、説明パターンが「経路説明」であることを示す。そして、列「３」は、ストリートビューＡを出力した後、地点Ｂに移動するようにストリートビューＢを出力することを示す。また、列「３」は、地図情報Ａを出力した後、移動するように地図情報Ｂを出力することを示す。また、列「３」は、地図情報を経路「Ａ→Ｂ」を強調する態様で出力することを示す。 The third column (column “3”) of the output control table is a case where there is no inclusion relationship between the area indicated by the point information (A) and the area indicated by the point information (B). The distance is within the threshold value, and the explanation pattern is “route explanation”. The column “3” indicates that after the street view A is output, the street view B is output so as to move to the point B. The column “3” indicates that the map information B is output so as to move after the map information A is output. Column “3” indicates that map information is output in a manner that emphasizes the route “A → B”.
　さらに、出力制御表の第四列目（列「４」）は、地点情報（Ａ）が示す領域と地点情報（Ｂ）のが示す領域との包含関係がない場合であり、地点ＡとＢとの距離が閾値より長い場合であり、説明パターンが「比較説明」であることを示す。そして、ストリートビューＡとストリートビューＢとを共に出力することを示す。また、列「４」は、ＡとＢとを含む地図情報を出力することを示す。また、列「４」は、地図情報の地点Ａ、地点Ｂを強調する態様で出力することを示す。 Further, the fourth column (column “4”) of the output control table is a case where there is no inclusion relationship between the area indicated by the point information (A) and the area indicated by the point information (B). This indicates that the explanation pattern is “comparison explanation”. Then, it is shown that street view A and street view B are output together. Column “4” indicates that map information including A and B is output. Column “4” indicates that the points A and B of the map information are output in an emphasized manner.
　かかる状況において、以下の４つの具体例について説明する。 In this situation, the following four specific examples will be described.
（具体例１）
　具体例１は、複数の地点情報の空間的関係情報を用いて取得される説明パターンが「地点説明」である場合である。 (Specific example 1)
Specific example 1 is a case where the explanation pattern acquired using the spatial relationship information of a plurality of pieces of spot information is “spot explanation”.
　今、番組受信部１３は番組を受信する。そして、番組出力部１５は、受信された番組を出力する。 Now, the program receiving unit 13 receives the program. Then, the program output unit 15 outputs the received program.
　また、番組関連情報受信部１４は、文字多重放送を受信する。次に、地点情報取得部１６は、受信された文字多重放送であり、閾値以内の時間の文字多重放送（同一シーンの番組の文字多重放送）から、２つの地点情報「京都，金閣寺」を取得した、とする。なお、地点情報取得部１６は、例えば、文字多重放送の文字列を形態素解析し、地名を地点情報として取得しても良いし、地図情報格納部１０の１以上の地点情報に合致する地点情報を、文字多重放送の文字列から抽出しても良い。地点情報取得部１６は、例えば、形態素解析の結果が「名詞，固有名詞，地域，一般」と判定される単語、または「名詞，接尾，地域」と判定される語句を含む直前の名詞句を地点情報として取得する。 Also, the program related information receiving unit 14 receives text multiplex broadcasting. Next, the point information acquisition unit 16 is the received character multiplex broadcast, and acquires two pieces of point information “Kyoto, Kinkakuji” from the character multiplex broadcast within the threshold time (character multiplex broadcast of the program of the same scene). Suppose that In addition, the point information acquisition part 16 may acquire the place name as point information, for example, by performing a morphological analysis on the character string of the text multiplex broadcast, or the point information that matches one or more pieces of point information in the map information storage unit 10 May be extracted from the character string of the text multiplex broadcast. The point information acquisition unit 16 may, for example, obtain a noun phrase immediately before a word that is determined to be “noun, proper noun, region, general” or a word that is determined to be “noun, suffix, region”. Acquired as point information.
　次に、地点関連情報出力部１８は、２つ地点情報「京都，金閣寺」を、地点情報のリストの領域に出力する。また、地点関連情報出力部１８は、地点情報「京都，金閣寺」を、地点関連情報格納部１１に一時蓄積する。 Next, the spot related information output unit 18 outputs the two spot information “Kyoto, Kinkakuji” to the area of the spot information list. Further, the spot related information output unit 18 temporarily stores the spot information “Kyoto, Kinkakuji” in the spot related information storage unit 11.
　次に、地点関連情報取得部１７は、２つ地点情報「京都，金閣寺」の空間的関係情報「京都⊃金閣寺」を取得する。そして、ストリートビュー取得手段１７１は、出力制御表を参照し、「金閣寺」に対応するストリートビューを取得する。次に、ストリートビュー出力手段１８１は、取得されたストリートビューを出力する。 Next, the spot-related information acquisition unit 17 acquires the spatial relation information “Kyoto-Kinkakuji” of the two spot information “Kyoto, Kinkakuji”. Then, the street view acquisition unit 171 refers to the output control table and acquires a street view corresponding to “Kinkakuji”. Next, the street view output means 181 outputs the acquired street view.
　また、地図情報取得手段１７２は、「京都」に対応する地図情報を取得する。次に、「金閣寺」に対応する地図情報を取得する。そして、地図情報出力手段１８２は、「京都」に対応する地図情報を出力した後、ズームインする態様で、「金閣寺」に対応する地図情報を出力する。 Also, the map information acquisition means 172 acquires map information corresponding to “Kyoto”. Next, map information corresponding to “Kinkakuji” is acquired. Then, the map information output means 182 outputs the map information corresponding to “Kinkakuji” in a manner of zooming in after outputting the map information corresponding to “Kyoto”.
　なお、かかる場合の出力例は、図４である。図４において、４１が番組、４２がストリートビュー、４３が地図情報、４４が地点情報のリストである。 An output example in such a case is shown in FIG. In FIG. 4, 41 is a program, 42 is a street view, 43 is map information, and 44 is a list of point information.
　また、図４の４４の「金閣寺」の指示を、受付部１２が受け付けた場合、「金閣寺」に対応するストリートビューが出力される。また、受付部１２が受け付けた場合、「金閣寺」に対応する地図情報が出力される。 In addition, when the reception unit 12 receives the instruction of “Kinkakuji” in 44 of FIG. 4, a street view corresponding to “Kinkakuji” is output. When the reception unit 12 receives the map information, the map information corresponding to “Kinkakuji” is output.
　なお、番組等の出力態様は、問わない。出力例は、図５のようなものでも良い。図５において、５１は番組、５２はストリートビュー、５３は地図情報である。なお、図５において、地点情報のリストは出力されていない。 In addition, the output mode of the program etc. does not matter. An output example may be as shown in FIG. In FIG. 5, 51 is a program, 52 is a street view, and 53 is map information. In FIG. 5, the list of point information is not output.
（具体例２）
　具体例２は、複数の地点情報の空間的関係情報を用いて取得される説明パターンが「地域説明」である場合である。 (Specific example 2)
Specific example 2 is a case where the explanation pattern acquired using the spatial relationship information of a plurality of pieces of point information is “region explanation”.
　今、番組受信部１３は番組を受信する。そして、番組出力部１５は、受信された番組を出力する。 Now, the program receiving unit 13 receives the program. Then, the program output unit 15 outputs the received program.
　また、番組関連情報受信部１４は、同一シーンの番組の文字多重放送を受信する。次に、地点情報取得部１６は、受信された文字多重放送から、２つの地点情報「金閣寺，京都」を取得した、とする。 Also, the program related information receiving unit 14 receives a text multiplex broadcast of a program in the same scene. Next, it is assumed that the point information acquisition unit 16 has acquired two pieces of point information “Kinkakuji, Kyoto” from the received text multiplex broadcast.
　次に、地点関連情報出力部１８は、２つ地点情報「金閣寺，京都」を、地点情報のリストの領域に出力する。また、地点関連情報出力部１８は、地点情報「金閣寺，京都」を、地点関連情報格納部１１に一時蓄積する。 Next, the spot related information output unit 18 outputs the two spot information “Kinkakuji, Kyoto” to the area of the spot information list. Further, the spot related information output unit 18 temporarily stores the spot information “Kinkakuji, Kyoto” in the spot related information storage unit 11.
　次に、地点関連情報取得部１７は、２つ地点情報「京都，金閣寺」の空間的関係情報「金閣寺⊂京都」を取得する。そして、ストリートビュー取得手段１７１は、出力制御表を参照し、「金閣寺」に対応するストリートビューを取得する。次に、ストリートビュー出力手段１８１は、取得されたストリートビューを出力する。 Next, the spot related information acquisition unit 17 acquires the spatial relation information “Kinkakuji-Kyoto” of the two spot information “Kyoto, Kinkakuji”. Then, the street view acquisition unit 171 refers to the output control table and acquires a street view corresponding to “Kinkakuji”. Next, the street view output means 181 outputs the acquired street view.
　また、地図情報取得手段１７２は、「金閣寺」に対応する地図情報を取得する。次に、「京都」に対応する地図情報を取得する。そして、地図情報出力手段１８２は、「金閣寺」に対応する地図情報を出力した後、ズームアウトする態様で、「京都」に対応する地図情報を出力する。 Also, the map information acquisition means 172 acquires map information corresponding to “Kinkakuji”. Next, map information corresponding to “Kyoto” is acquired. Then, the map information output means 182 outputs the map information corresponding to “Kyoto” in a manner of zooming out after outputting the map information corresponding to “Kinkakuji”.
（具体例３）
　具体例３は、複数の地点情報の空間的関係情報を用いて取得される説明パターンが「経路説明」である場合である。 (Specific example 3)
Specific example 3 is a case where the explanation pattern acquired using the spatial relationship information of a plurality of pieces of point information is “route explanation”.
　今、番組受信部１３は番組を受信する。そして、番組出力部１５は、受信された番組を出力する。 Now, the program receiving unit 13 receives the program. Then, the program output unit 15 outputs the received program.
　また、番組関連情報受信部１４は、同一シーンの番組の文字多重放送を受信する。次に、地点情報取得部１６は、受信された文字多重放送から、２つの地点情報「金閣寺，龍安寺」を取得した、とする。 Also, the program related information receiving unit 14 receives a text multiplex broadcast of a program in the same scene. Next, it is assumed that the point information acquisition unit 16 has acquired two pieces of point information “Kinkakuji, Ryoanji” from the received text multiplex broadcast.
　次に、地点関連情報出力部１８は、２つ地点情報「金閣寺，龍安寺」を、地点情報のリストの領域に出力する。また、地点関連情報出力部１８は、地点情報「金閣寺，龍安寺」を、地点関連情報格納部１１に一時蓄積する。 Next, the point related information output unit 18 outputs two pieces of point information “Kinkakuji, Ryoanji” to the area of the point information list. The point related information output unit 18 temporarily stores the point information “Kinkakuji, Ryoanji” in the point related information storage unit 11.
　次に、地点関連情報取得部１７は、２つ地点情報「金閣寺，龍安寺」の空間的関係情報のうちの包含関係「無し」を取得する。そして、地点関連情報取得部１７は、２つ地点情報「金閣寺，龍安寺」の（緯度，経度）を地図情報格納部１０の地図情報を用いて取得する。次に、地点関連情報取得部１７は、２つ地点情報「金閣寺，龍安寺」の距離Ｘを取得する。次に、地点関連情報取得部１７は、距離Ｘは閾値以内である、と判断する。 Next, the spot related information acquisition unit 17 acquires the inclusion relation “none” in the spatial relation information of the two spot information “Kinkakuji, Ryoanji”. Then, the spot related information acquisition unit 17 acquires (latitude, longitude) of the two spot information “Kinkakuji, Ryoanji” using the map information of the map information storage unit 10. Next, the spot related information acquisition unit 17 acquires the distance X of the two spot information “Kinkakuji, Ryoanji”. Next, the spot related information acquisition unit 17 determines that the distance X is within a threshold value.
　そして、ストリートビュー取得手段１７１は、出力制御表を参照し、「金閣寺」に対応するストリートビューを取得する。次に、ストリートビュー出力手段１８１は、取得されたストリートビューを出力する。また、ストリートビュー取得手段１７１は、出力制御表を参照し、「龍安寺」に対応するストリートビューを取得する。そして、ストリートビューで「金閣寺」から「龍安寺」に移動するように、ストリートビュー出力手段１８１は、「龍安寺」に対応するストリートビューを出力する。なお、２つの地点間を移動するようなストリートビューを出力する技術は公知技術である。 Then, the street view acquisition unit 171 refers to the output control table and acquires a street view corresponding to “Kinkakuji”. Next, the street view output means 181 outputs the acquired street view. Further, the street view acquisition means 171 refers to the output control table and acquires a street view corresponding to “Ryoanji”. Then, the street view output means 181 outputs the street view corresponding to “Ryoanji” so as to move from “Kinkakuji” to “Ryoanji” in the street view. A technique for outputting a street view that moves between two points is a known technique.
　また、地図情報取得手段１７２は、「金閣寺」に対応する地図情報を取得する。次に、「龍安寺」に対応する地図情報を取得する。そして、地図情報出力手段１８２は、「金閣寺」に対応する地図情報を出力した後、移動する態様で、「龍安寺」に対応する地図情報を出力する。また、地図情報出力手段１８２は、金閣寺から龍安寺の経路を強調して出力する。なお、かかる場合、地図情報取得手段１７２は、経路探索機能を有する、とする。また、地図情報を用いた経路探索機能は公知技術であるので、その説明を省略する。 Also, the map information acquisition means 172 acquires map information corresponding to “Kinkakuji”. Next, map information corresponding to “Ryoanji” is acquired. Then, the map information output means 182 outputs the map information corresponding to “Ryoanji” in a manner of moving after outputting the map information corresponding to “Kinkakuji”. Further, the map information output means 182 emphasizes and outputs the route from Kinkakuji to Ryoanji. In this case, it is assumed that the map information acquisition unit 172 has a route search function. Moreover, since the route search function using map information is a well-known technique, the description thereof is omitted.
（具体例４）
　具体例４は、複数の地点情報の空間的関係情報を用いて取得される説明パターンが「比較説明」である場合である。 (Specific example 4)
Specific example 4 is a case where the explanation pattern acquired using the spatial relationship information of a plurality of pieces of point information is “comparison explanation”.
　今、番組受信部１３は番組を受信する。そして、番組出力部１５は、受信された番組を出力する。 Now, the program receiving unit 13 receives the program. Then, the program output unit 15 outputs the received program.
　また、番組関連情報受信部１４は、同一シーンの番組の文字多重放送を受信する。次に、地点情報取得部１６は、受信された文字多重放送から、２つの地点情報「金閣寺，銀閣寺」を取得した、とする。 Also, the program related information receiving unit 14 receives a text multiplex broadcast of a program in the same scene. Next, it is assumed that the point information acquisition unit 16 has acquired two pieces of point information “Kinkakuji, Ginkakuji” from the received text multiplex broadcast.
　次に、地点関連情報出力部１８は、２つ地点情報「金閣寺，銀閣寺」を、地点情報のリストの領域に出力する。また、地点関連情報出力部１８は、地点情報「金閣寺，銀閣寺」を、地点関連情報格納部１１に一時蓄積する。 Next, the spot related information output unit 18 outputs the two spot information “Kinkakuji, Ginkakuji” to the area of the spot information list. The point related information output unit 18 temporarily stores the point information “Kinkakuji, Ginkakuji” in the point related information storage unit 11.
　次に、地点関連情報取得部１７は、２つ地点情報「金閣寺，銀閣寺」の空間的関係情報のうちの包含関係「無し」を取得する。そして、地点関連情報取得部１７は、２つ地点情報「金閣寺，銀閣寺」の（緯度，経度）を地図情報格納部１０の地図情報を用いて取得する。次に、地点関連情報取得部１７は、２つ地点情報「金閣寺，銀閣寺」の距離Ｘを取得する。次に、地点関連情報取得部１７は、距離Ｘは閾値より長いである、と判断する。 Next, the spot related information acquisition unit 17 acquires the inclusion relation “none” in the spatial relation information of the two spot information “Kinkakuji, Ginkakuji”. The point-related information acquisition unit 17 acquires (latitude, longitude) of the two point information “Kinkakuji, Ginkakuji” using the map information in the map information storage unit 10. Next, the spot related information acquisition unit 17 acquires the distance X of the two spot information “Kinkakuji, Ginkakuji”. Next, the spot related information acquisition unit 17 determines that the distance X is longer than the threshold value.
　そして、ストリートビュー取得手段１７１は、出力制御表を参照し、「金閣寺」に対応するストリートビューを取得する。次に、ストリートビュー出力手段１８１は、取得されたストリートビューを出力する。 Then, the street view acquisition unit 171 refers to the output control table and acquires a street view corresponding to “Kinkakuji”. Next, the street view output means 181 outputs the acquired street view.
　また、ストリートビュー取得手段１７１は、「銀閣寺」に対応するストリートビューを取得する。次に、ストリートビュー出力手段１８１は、取得されたストリートビューを出力する。つまり、図４の４２の領域が２つに分割され、２つのストリートビューが出力される。 Further, the street view acquisition means 171 acquires a street view corresponding to “Ginkakuji”. Next, the street view output means 181 outputs the acquired street view. That is, the area 42 in FIG. 4 is divided into two, and two street views are output.
　また、地図情報取得手段１７２は、「金閣寺」と「銀閣寺」とを含む地図情報を取得する。そして、地図情報出力手段１８２は、「金閣寺」と「銀閣寺」とを含む地図情報を出力する。そして、地図情報出力手段１８２は、地図上の「金閣寺」と「銀閣寺」とを強調表示する。 Also, the map information acquisition means 172 acquires map information including “Kinkakuji” and “Ginkakuji”. Then, the map information output means 182 outputs map information including “Kinkakuji” and “Ginkakuji”. Then, the map information output means 182 highlights “Kinkakuji” and “Ginkakuji” on the map.
　以上、本実施の形態によれば、番組に出現する地点に関する地点関連情報を番組と共に容易に出力できる。 As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to easily output the spot related information regarding the spot appearing in the program together with the program.
　また、本実施の形態によれば、２以上の地点情報を用いて、２以上の地点関連情報を連続して取得し、地点関連情報の動きを出力できる。そのことにより、番組に出現する２以上の地点に関する２以上の地点関連情報を番組と共に容易に出力し、番組の中での地点の移動等をより深く理解できる番組受信装置１を提供できる。 In addition, according to the present embodiment, two or more pieces of point related information can be acquired continuously using two or more pieces of point information, and the movement of the point related information can be output. Accordingly, it is possible to provide the program receiving apparatus 1 that can easily output two or more point-related information regarding two or more points appearing in the program together with the program and can understand the movement of the point in the program more deeply.
　また、本実施の形態によれば、２つ以上の地点情報の空間的関係情報を用いて、２以上の地点関連情報を連続して取得し、かつ、取得した空間的関係情報に応じて、２以上の地点関連情報の取得方法が異なる番組受信装置１を提供できる。 Moreover, according to this Embodiment, using the spatial relationship information of two or more point information, two or more point related information is acquired continuously, and according to the acquired spatial relationship information, It is possible to provide a program receiving apparatus 1 that has two or more point-related information acquisition methods different from each other.
　また、本実施の形態によれば、番組に出現する地点に関するストリートビューを番組と共に出力し、番組では表現しにくい距離感や周囲の雰囲気をより伝えることができる番組受信装置１を提供できる。 Further, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a program receiving apparatus 1 that can output a street view regarding a point appearing in a program together with the program, and can convey a sense of distance and surrounding atmosphere that are difficult to express in the program.
　なお、本実施の形態における処理は、ソフトウェアで実現しても良い。そして、このソフトウェアをソフトウェアダウンロード等により配布しても良い。また、このソフトウェアをＣＤ－ＲＯＭなどの記録媒体に記録して流布しても良い。なお、このことは、本明細書における他の実施の形態においても該当する。なお、本実施の形態における情報処理装置を実現するソフトウェアは、以下のようなプログラムである。つまり、このプログラムは、コンピュータを、番組を受信する番組受信部と、当該番組に関連する情報であり、１または２以上の地点情報を含む番組関連情報を受信する番組関連情報受信部と、前記番組受信部が受信した番組を出力する番組出力部と、前記番組関連情報受信部が受信した番組関連情報から１または２以上の地点情報を取得する地点情報取得部と、前記地点情報取得部が取得した地点情報に対応する情報であり、当該地点情報に関する情報である１または２種類以上の地点関連情報を取得する地点関連情報取得部と、前記地点関連情報取得部が取得した１または２種類以上の地点関連情報を、前記番組と共に出力する地点関連情報出力部として機能させるためのプログラムである。 Note that the processing in the present embodiment may be realized by software. Then, this software may be distributed by software download or the like. Further, this software may be recorded on a recording medium such as a CD-ROM and distributed. This also applies to other embodiments in this specification. Note that the software that implements the information processing apparatus according to the present embodiment is the following program. That is, the program includes a program receiving unit that receives a program, a program related information receiving unit that receives program related information that is information related to the program and includes one or more pieces of point information, A program output unit for outputting a program received by the program receiving unit, a point information acquiring unit for acquiring one or more pieces of point information from the program related information received by the program related information receiving unit, and the point information acquiring unit It is information corresponding to the acquired point information, and a point related information acquisition unit that acquires one or more types of point related information that is information related to the point information, and one or two types acquired by the point related information acquisition unit It is a program for functioning as the point related information output part which outputs the above point related information with the said program.
　また、上記プログラムにおいて、前記地点関連情報取得部は、前記地点情報取得部が取得した２以上の地点情報を用いて、２以上の地点関連情報を連続して取得し、前記地点関連情報出力部は、前記地点関連情報取得部が連続して取得した２以上の地点関連情報を出力することにより、地点関連情報の動きを出力するものとして、コンピュータを機能させるプログラムであることは好適である。 In the above program, the point-related information acquisition unit continuously acquires two or more point-related information using the two or more point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit, and the point-related information output unit Is preferably a program that causes a computer to function as outputting movement of point-related information by outputting two or more pieces of point-related information continuously acquired by the point-related information acquisition unit.
　また、上記プログラムにおいて、前記地点関連情報取得部は、前記地点情報取得部が取得した２以上の各地点情報の空間的な関係を示す空間的関係情報を取得し、当該空間的関係情報を用いて、２以上の地点関連情報を連続して取得し、かつ、取得した空間的関係情報に応じて、２以上の地点関連情報の取得方法が異なるものとして、コンピュータを機能させるプログラムであることは好適である。 In the above program, the point-related information acquisition unit acquires spatial relationship information indicating a spatial relationship between two or more pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit, and uses the spatial relationship information. Thus, it is a program that causes a computer to function by continuously acquiring two or more spot-related information and assuming that the acquisition method of the two or more spot-related information differs according to the acquired spatial relation information. Is preferred.
　また、上記プログラムにおいて、前記１または２種類以上の地点関連情報は、ストリートビューを含むものとして、コンピュータを機能させるプログラムであることは好適である。 In the above program, it is preferable that the one or more types of point-related information are programs that cause a computer to function as including street view.
　また、上記プログラムにおいて、前記地点関連情報取得部は、前記地点情報取得部が取得した２以上の地点情報を用いて、少なくとも一つの地点情報の位置を示す位置情報、および前記２以上の地点情報間の方角に関する方角情報を取得し、当該位置情報および当該方角情報を用いて、ストリートビューを取得するものとして、コンピュータを機能させるプログラムであることは好適である。 In the above program, the point-related information acquisition unit uses the two or more pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit to use the position information indicating the position of at least one piece of point information, and the two or more pieces of point information. It is preferable that the program is a program that causes a computer to function as the one that acquires direction information regarding the directions in between and acquires the street view using the position information and the direction information.
　また、上記プログラムにおいて、前記地点関連情報取得部は、前記位置情報を用いて、当該位置情報のカメラ映像を取得し、前記方角情報を用いて、取得したカメラ映像から当該方角情報が示す方角に対応するストリートビューを取得するものとして、コンピュータを機能させるプログラムであることは好適である。 In the above program, the location-related information acquisition unit acquires the camera image of the position information using the position information, and uses the direction information in the direction indicated by the direction information from the acquired camera image. It is preferable that the program obtains the corresponding street view so that the computer functions.
　また、上記プログラムにおいて、前記１または２種類以上の地点関連情報は、ストリートビューを含み、前記地点関連情報出力部は、前記空間的関係情報を用いて、前記２以上の地点情報が示す２以上の地点を移動する態様で、ストリートビューを出力するものとして、コンピュータを機能させるプログラムであることは好適である。 In the above program, the one or more types of point-related information includes street view, and the point-related information output unit uses the spatial relationship information to indicate two or more points indicated by the two or more point information. It is preferable that the program is a program that causes a computer to function as an output of street view in a manner of moving the point.
　また、上記プログラムにおいて、前記１または２種類以上の地点関連情報は、地図情報を含むものとして、コンピュータを機能させるプログラムであることは好適である。 In the above program, it is preferable that the one or more types of point-related information is a program that causes a computer to function as including map information.
　また、上記プログラムにおいて、前記地点関連情報取得部は、前記地点情報取得部が取得した２以上の各地点情報の空間的な関係を示す空間的関係情報を取得し、当該空間的関係情報に対応する地図情報を取得し、前記地点関連情報出力部は、前記空間的関係情報に応じて、異なる態様で地図情報を出力するものとして、コンピュータを機能させるプログラムであることは好適である。 In the above program, the point-related information acquisition unit acquires spatial relationship information indicating a spatial relationship between two or more pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit, and corresponds to the spatial relationship information. Preferably, the point-related information output unit is a program that causes a computer to function as outputting map information in a different manner according to the spatial relationship information.
　また、上記プログラムにおいて、前記地点関連情報出力部は、前記地点情報取得部が取得した２つの地点情報であり、第一の地点情報と当該第一の地点情報の後に受信された第二の地点情報との空間的関係情報に応じて、前記第一の地点情報に対応する地図情報を出力した後、前記第二の地点情報に対応する地図情報にズームインまたはズームアウトする態様で前記第二の地点情報を出力するものとして、コンピュータを機能させるプログラムであることは好適である。 In the above program, the point-related information output unit is two pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit, and the second point received after the first point information and the first point information. According to the spatial relationship information with the information, after outputting the map information corresponding to the first point information, the second information is zoomed in or zoomed out to the map information corresponding to the second point information. A program that causes a computer to function as the point information output is suitable.
　また、上記プログラムにおいて、前記地点関連情報出力部は、前記地点情報取得部が取得した２つの地点情報であり、第一の地点情報と当該第一の地点情報の後に受信された第二の地点情報との空間的関係情報に応じて、前記第一の地点情報が示す地点と前記第二の地点情報が示す地点とを含む地図情報を出力するものとして、コンピュータを機能させるプログラムであることは好適である。 In the above program, the point-related information output unit is two pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit, and the second point received after the first point information and the first point information. It is a program that causes a computer to function as outputting map information including a point indicated by the first point information and a point indicated by the second point information in accordance with spatial relation information with the information. Is preferred.
　（実施の形態２）
　本実施の形態において、番組関連情報（例えば、文字多重放送により放送される字幕データ、電子番組表、番組の内容を説明するＷｅｂページ等）から１以上のキー情報を取得し、当該１以上のキー情報を用いて、番組を補助する番組補助情報を出力する情報処理装置について説明する。なお、キー情報とは、予め決められたカテゴリーに属する用語であり、その詳細は後述する。 (Embodiment 2)
In the present embodiment, one or more key information is acquired from program-related information (for example, subtitle data broadcast by text multiplex broadcasting, an electronic program guide, a web page explaining the contents of a program, etc.), and the one or more key information is acquired. An information processing apparatus that outputs program auxiliary information for assisting a program using key information will be described. The key information is a term belonging to a predetermined category, and details thereof will be described later.
　また、本実施の形態において、１または２以上のキー情報を用いて、２種類以上の番組補助情報を出力する情報処理装置について説明する。 Also, in the present embodiment, an information processing apparatus that outputs two or more types of program auxiliary information using one or more key information will be described.
　また、本実施の形態において、２以上のキー情報の関係（例えば、空間的な関係）に応じて、異なる種類の番組補助情報を出力する情報処理装置について説明する。 Also, in the present embodiment, an information processing apparatus that outputs different types of program auxiliary information according to the relationship (for example, spatial relationship) between two or more pieces of key information will be described.
　また、本実施の形態において、番組におけるシーンの切り替わりを考慮して、番組補助情報を出力する情報処理装置について説明する。 Further, in the present embodiment, an information processing apparatus that outputs program auxiliary information in consideration of scene switching in a program will be described.
　また、本実施の形態において、番組の種類に応じて、出力する番組補助情報や、番組補助情報の出力方法（レイアウト等）を変更する情報処理装置について説明する。 Also, in the present embodiment, an information processing apparatus for changing program auxiliary information to be output and a method for outputting program auxiliary information (layout, etc.) according to the type of program will be described.
　また、本実施の形態において、２以上のキー情報である２以上の地点情報を用いて、移動の交通手段（徒歩、電車等）を判断し、判断結果を用いて出力する地図等の番組補助情報を変更する情報処理装置について説明する。 In this embodiment, two or more pieces of key information, which are two or more key information, are used to determine transportation means (walking, train, etc.) of movement, and program assistance such as a map that is output using the determination result. An information processing apparatus that changes information will be described.
　図６は、本実施の形態における情報処理装置２のブロック図である。 FIG. 6 is a block diagram of the information processing apparatus 2 in the present embodiment.
　情報処理装置２は、地図情報格納部１０、受付部１２、番組受信部１３、番組関連情報受信部１４、番組出力部１５、電子番組表格納部２０、キー情報取得部２１、シーン判断部２２、番組種類取得部２３、移動手段情報取得部２４、番組補助情報取得部２５、番組補助情報出力部２６を備える。 The information processing apparatus 2 includes a map information storage unit 10, a reception unit 12, a program reception unit 13, a program related information reception unit 14, a program output unit 15, an electronic program guide storage unit 20, a key information acquisition unit 21, and a scene determination unit 22. , A program type acquisition unit 23, a moving means information acquisition unit 24, a program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25, and a program auxiliary information output unit 26.
　番組関連情報受信部１４は、出力中の番組に関連する情報であり、１または２以上のキー情報を含む番組関連情報を受信する。番組関連情報は、文字多重放送による字幕データ、電子番組表、番組の内容を説明するＷｅｂページ等である。また、キー情報は、地点のカテゴリーに属する用語である地点情報である。 The program related information receiving unit 14 is information related to the program being output, and receives program related information including one or more key information. The program-related information is subtitle data by character multiplex broadcasting, an electronic program guide, a Web page explaining the contents of the program, and the like. The key information is point information which is a term belonging to the point category.
　電子番組表格納部２０は、電子番組表を格納し得る。電子番組表は、通常、情報処理装置２が受信した情報である。なお、電子番組表は、例えば、番組関連情報受信部１４または番組受信部１３が受信する。 The electronic program guide storage unit 20 can store an electronic program guide. The electronic program guide is usually information received by the information processing apparatus 2. The electronic program guide is received by, for example, the program related information receiving unit 14 or the program receiving unit 13.
　キー情報取得部２１は、番組関連情報受信部１４が受信した番組関連情報から、予め決められたカテゴリーに属する用語である１または２以上のキー情報を取得する。予め決められたカテゴリーとは、予め決められた種類の情報であると言っても良いし、予め決められた属性を有する情報であると言っても良い。予め決められたカテゴリーとは、例えば、地名、人名、番組名、テレビ局名等である。つまり、キー情報は、地点を示す地点情報、人名を示す人名情報等である。なお、本実施の形態において、キー情報は、主として、地点情報である、とする。 The key information acquisition unit 21 acquires one or more key information, which are terms belonging to a predetermined category, from the program related information received by the program related information receiving unit 14. The predetermined category may be said to be information of a predetermined type, or may be information having a predetermined attribute. The predetermined category includes, for example, a place name, a person name, a program name, and a television station name. That is, the key information is point information indicating a point, personal name information indicating a personal name, and the like. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the key information is mainly point information.
　キー情報取得部２１は、番組関連情報受信部１４が受信した番組関連情報から、２以上のキー情報を取得することは好適である。 The key information acquisition unit 21 preferably acquires two or more pieces of key information from the program related information received by the program related information receiving unit 14.
　キー情報取得部２１が番組関連情報から地点情報または人名情報等のキー情報を取得する技術は公知技術である。キー情報取得部２１は、例えば、番組関連情報を形態素解析し、名詞または名詞句を取得する。そして、キー情報取得部２１は、取得した名詞または名詞句をキーとして、地図情報格納部１０を検索し、地点情報であるキー情報を取得する。また、キー情報取得部２１は、取得した名詞または名詞句をキーとして、図示しない人名辞書を検索し、人名であるキー情報を取得する。なお、人名辞書は、情報処理装置２が保持していても良いし、Ｗｅｂ検索を行うなどしても良い。 The technique in which the key information acquisition unit 21 acquires key information such as point information or personal name information from program-related information is a known technique. For example, the key information acquisition unit 21 performs morphological analysis on program-related information and acquires a noun or noun phrase. And the key information acquisition part 21 searches the map information storage part 10 by using the acquired noun or noun phrase as a key, and acquires the key information which is point information. The key information acquisition unit 21 searches a personal name dictionary (not shown) using the acquired noun or noun phrase as a key, and acquires key information that is a personal name. Note that the personal name dictionary may be held by the information processing apparatus 2 or may be subjected to a web search.
　シーン判断部２２は、番組におけるシーンの切り替わりを判断する。シーン判断部２２は、例えば、キー情報を取得してから予め決められた時間（例えば、１５秒）以上が経過した場合に、シーンが切り替わったと判断する。つまり、シーン判断部２２は、例えば、取得したキー情報のうち、最も新しいキー情報を取得してから予め決められた時間（例えば、１５秒）以上が経過した場合に、シーンが切り替わったと判断する。また、シーン判断部２２は、例えば、定期的（例えば、１５秒ごと）に、シーンが切り替わったと判断する。また、シーン判断部２２は、例えば、キー情報取得部２１が最初にキー情報を取得した後、予め決められた時間（例えば、１５秒）、経過した場合に、シーンが切り替わったと判断する。また、シーン判断部２２は、例えば、現在、出力されている番組の画像と直前に出力された画像とを比較して、予め決められた以上の変化があると判断した場合、シーンが切り替わったと判断する。なお、２つの画像の類似度または相違度を取得する技術は公知技術であり、かかる類似度または相違度を用いて、シーン判断部２２は、予め決められた以上の変化があるか否かを判断しても良い。 The scene determination unit 22 determines scene switching in the program. For example, the scene determination unit 22 determines that the scene has been switched when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) or more has elapsed since the key information was acquired. That is, for example, the scene determination unit 22 determines that the scene has been switched when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) or more has elapsed since the acquisition of the latest key information among the acquired key information. . The scene determination unit 22 determines that the scene has been switched, for example, periodically (for example, every 15 seconds). For example, the scene determination unit 22 determines that the scene has been switched when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses after the key information acquisition unit 21 first acquires the key information. In addition, for example, when the scene determination unit 22 compares the image of the currently output program with the image output immediately before and determines that there is more than a predetermined change, the scene is switched. to decide. Note that a technique for obtaining the similarity or difference between two images is a known technique, and the scene determination unit 22 uses the similarity or difference to determine whether there is a change greater than a predetermined value. You may judge.
　番組種類取得部２３は、番組の種類を取得する。番組種類取得部２３は、電子番組表格納部２０に格納されている電子番組表の番組のジャンルであり、出力中の番組のジャンルを取得する。なお、番組の種類とは、通常、番組のジャンルである。 The program type acquisition unit 23 acquires the type of program. The program type acquisition unit 23 is the genre of the program in the electronic program guide stored in the electronic program guide storage unit 20, and acquires the genre of the program being output. The type of program is usually the genre of the program.
　移動手段情報取得部２４は、２以上のキー情報を用いて、番組内で使用している移動手段の種類を示す移動手段情報を取得する。ここで、キー情報は、通常、地点情報である。移動手段情報取得部２４は、例えば、２つの地点情報が出現した時間間隔と、２つの地点情報が示す２つの地点間の距離とを用いて、移動速度を取得し、移動速度を用いて、徒歩での移動か、電車での移動か、自動車での移動か等を決定する。移動手段情報取得部２４は、例えば、移動手段情報と移動速度の幅を示す情報との組を２組以上、格納しており、取得した移動速度に対応する移動手段情報を取得する。 The moving means information acquisition unit 24 acquires moving means information indicating the type of moving means used in the program using two or more pieces of key information. Here, the key information is usually point information. For example, the moving means information acquisition unit 24 acquires the moving speed using the time interval at which two pieces of point information appear and the distance between the two points indicated by the two pieces of point information, and uses the moving speed, Decide whether to move on foot, move by train, or move by car. The moving means information acquisition unit 24 stores, for example, two or more sets of moving means information and information indicating the width of the moving speed, and acquires moving means information corresponding to the acquired moving speed.
　番組補助情報取得部２５は、キー情報取得部２１が取得したキー情報に対応する情報であり、番組の内容を補足する情報である番組補助情報を取得する。なお、番組補助情報とは、例えば、写真、ストリートビュー、地図情報、ブログ、電車の路線を示す情報等である。番組補助情報取得部２５は、キー情報を属性として付された写真を取得しても良い。また、番組補助情報取得部２５は、キー情報をキーとして、Ｗｅｂ上の写真を検索して、写真を取得しても良い。また、番組補助情報取得部２５は、１または２以上の地点情報（キー情報）を含む領域の地図を取得しても良い。また、番組補助情報取得部２５は、１または２以上の各地点情報に対応するストリートビューを取得しても良い。また、番組補助情報取得部２５は、キー情報である人名に対応するブログをＷｅｂから検索しても良い。なお、人名に対応するブログとは、人名で識別される人が記載したブログである。また、電車の路線を示す情報とは、出発駅から到着駅までの経路を示す情報である。なお、出発駅から到着駅までの経路を示す情の取得技術は公知技術である（例えば、ＵＲＬ「http://www.jorudan.co.jp/」参照）。 The program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 is information corresponding to the key information acquired by the key information acquisition unit 21, and acquires program auxiliary information which is information supplementing the contents of the program. The program auxiliary information is, for example, information indicating a photograph, street view, map information, a blog, a train route, and the like. The program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 may acquire a photograph with key information as an attribute. Moreover, the program supplementary information acquisition part 25 may search for the photograph on Web using key information as a key, and may acquire a photograph. Moreover, the program supplementary information acquisition part 25 may acquire the map of the area | region containing 1 or 2 or more point information (key information). Moreover, the program supplementary information acquisition part 25 may acquire the street view corresponding to 1 or 2 or more each point information. Moreover, the program supplementary information acquisition part 25 may search the blog corresponding to the person name which is key information from Web. The blog corresponding to the person name is a blog written by a person identified by the person name. The information indicating the train route is information indicating the route from the departure station to the arrival station. Note that the technology for acquiring information indicating the route from the departure station to the arrival station is a known technology (see, for example, the URL “http://www.jorudan.co.jp/”).
　番組補助情報取得部２５は、キー情報取得部２１が取得した２以上のキー情報を用いて、番組補助情報を取得することは好適である。例えば、番組補助情報取得部２５は、２以上の地点情報が示す２以上の地点をすべて含む地図情報、２以上の地点の経路上にある２または３以上のストリートビュー、２以上の地点に関する写真を取得することは好適である。 It is preferable that the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires the program auxiliary information using two or more pieces of key information acquired by the key information acquisition unit 21. For example, the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 includes map information including all two or more points indicated by two or more point information, two or three or more street views on the route of two or more points, and photographs regarding two or more points. It is preferable to acquire
　また、番組補助情報取得部２５は、キー情報取得部２１が連続して取得した２以上のキー情報を用いて、番組補助情報を取得することは好適である。 Further, it is preferable that the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires the program auxiliary information by using two or more key information continuously acquired by the key information acquisition unit 21.
　番組補助情報取得部２５は、２種類以上の番組補助情報を取得しても良い。番組補助情報取得部２５は、例えば、ストリートビューと地図情報とを取得する。また、番組補助情報取得部２５は、例えば、写真とストリートビューと地図情報とを取得する。 The program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 may acquire two or more types of program auxiliary information. The program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires, for example, street view and map information. Moreover, the program supplementary information acquisition part 25 acquires a photograph, a street view, and map information, for example.
　番組補助情報取得部２５は、２以上のキー情報の関係に応じて、異なる種類の番組補助情報を取得する。ここで、キー情報は、例えば、地点情報であり、関係とは、例えば、空間的関係である。空間的関係とは、例えば、２つのキー情報が示す２つの地点の包含関係や、２つの地点の距離に関する関係（閾値より近いか遠いか等）である。 The program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires different types of program auxiliary information according to the relationship between two or more pieces of key information. Here, the key information is, for example, point information, and the relationship is, for example, a spatial relationship. The spatial relationship is, for example, an inclusion relationship between two points indicated by two key information, or a relationship related to a distance between two points (whether it is closer or farther than a threshold value).
　番組補助情報取得部２５は、キー情報取得部２１が取得した２以上の各地点情報の空間的な関係を示す空間的関係情報を取得し、空間的関係情報を用いて、２以上の番組補助情報を連続して取得する。 The program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires spatial relationship information indicating a spatial relationship between two or more pieces of point information acquired by the key information acquisition unit 21, and uses the spatial relationship information to acquire two or more program auxiliary information. Get information continuously.
　番組補助情報は、地点に関する情報である地点関連情報を含んでも良い。また、番組補助情報は、人に関する情報である人関連情報を含んでも良い。 The program auxiliary information may include point-related information that is information about the point. Further, the program auxiliary information may include person-related information that is information about a person.
　番組補助情報出力部２６は、番組補助情報取得部２５が取得した番組補助情報を出力する。番組補助情報出力部２６は、例えば、１以上の出力制御情報を保持している。出力制御情報とは、出力する１種類以上の番組補助情報を特定する情報、または／および１種類以上の番組補助情報の出力方法を決定するための情報である。出力制御情報は、例えば、２つ以上のキー情報の空間的関係を示す空間的関係情報、説明パターンを識別する説明パターン識別子、１種類以上の各番組補助情報の出力方法を示す情報を有する。説明パターン識別子とは、番組補助情報の出力態様を決定するための識別子であり、番組を補助するパターンを示す情報である。 The program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs the program auxiliary information acquired by the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25. The program auxiliary information output unit 26 holds, for example, one or more output control information. The output control information is information for specifying one or more types of program auxiliary information to be output, and / or information for determining an output method of one or more types of program auxiliary information. The output control information includes, for example, spatial relationship information indicating a spatial relationship between two or more key information, an explanation pattern identifier for identifying a description pattern, and information indicating an output method of one or more types of program auxiliary information. The explanation pattern identifier is an identifier for determining an output mode of program auxiliary information, and is information indicating a pattern for assisting a program.
　番組補助情報出力部２６は、２種類以上の番組補助情報のうち、１または２種類以上の番組補助情報を出力する。番組補助情報出力部２６は、番組が出力される装置とは別のディスプレイに番組補助情報を出力しても良い。番組補助情報出力部２６は、番組が出力される装置とは別の装置に番組補助情報を出力しても良い。番組補助情報出力部２６は、番組が出力される装置とは別の装置に番組補助情報を送信しても良い。そして、当該別の装置（例えば、スマートフォン等の携帯端末）が番組補助情報を表示しても良い。 The program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs one or two or more types of program auxiliary information among two or more types of program auxiliary information. The program auxiliary information output unit 26 may output the program auxiliary information to a display different from the device that outputs the program. The program auxiliary information output unit 26 may output the program auxiliary information to a device different from the device that outputs the program. The program auxiliary information output unit 26 may transmit the program auxiliary information to a device different from the device that outputs the program. And another apparatus (for example, portable terminals, such as a smart phone) may display program auxiliary information.
　番組補助情報出力部２６は、一の種類の番組補助情報を出力できない場合に、他の種類の番組補助情報を出力することは好適である。 It is preferable that the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs other types of program auxiliary information when one type of program auxiliary information cannot be output.
　番組補助情報出力部２６は、シーン判断部２２が判断したシーンの切り替わりの際には、番組補助情報の連続した出力を行わないことは好適である。 It is preferable that the program supplementary information output unit 26 does not continuously output the program supplementary information when the scenes determined by the scene determination unit 22 are switched.
　番組補助情報出力部２６は、キー情報取得部２１が取得したキー情報に対応するストリートビューが出力できない場合に、キー情報取得部２１が取得したキー情報に対応する他の種類の番組補助情報を出力することは好適である。 The program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs other types of program auxiliary information corresponding to the key information acquired by the key information acquisition unit 21 when the street view corresponding to the key information acquired by the key information acquisition unit 21 cannot be output. It is preferable to output.
　番組補助情報出力部２６は、番組の種類に応じて、出力する番組補助情報の種類を変えることは好適である。また、番組補助情報出力部２６は、番組の種類に応じて、番組補助情報の出力態様を変えることは好適である。 It is preferable that the program auxiliary information output unit 26 changes the type of program auxiliary information to be output according to the type of program. The program auxiliary information output unit 26 preferably changes the output mode of the program auxiliary information according to the type of program.
　番組補助情報出力部２６は、移動手段情報に応じて、番組補助情報の出力態様を変えることは好適である。また、番組補助情報出力部２６は、移動手段情報に応じて、出力する番組補助情報を選択して、出力することは好適である。例えば、移動手段情報が「電車」を示す情報である場合、番組補助情報出力部２６は、地図情報に代えて、または地図情報に加えて、電車の路線を示す情報を出力することは好適である。 It is preferable that the program auxiliary information output unit 26 changes the output mode of the program auxiliary information according to the moving means information. Also, it is preferable that the program auxiliary information output unit 26 selects and outputs the program auxiliary information to be output according to the moving means information. For example, when the moving means information is information indicating “train”, it is preferable that the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs information indicating the train route instead of or in addition to the map information. is there.
　番組補助情報出力部２６は、番組補助情報を番組と共に出力することは好適である。 It is preferable that the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs the program auxiliary information together with the program.
　電子番組表格納部２０は、不揮発性の記録媒体が好適であるが、揮発性の記録媒体でも実現可能である。 The electronic program guide storage unit 20 is preferably a non-volatile recording medium, but can also be realized by a volatile recording medium.
　電子番組表格納部２０に電子番組表が記憶される過程は問わない。例えば、記録媒体を介して電子番組表が電子番組表格納部２０で記憶されるようになってもよく、通信回線等を介して送信された電子番組表が電子番組表格納部２０で記憶されるようになってもよく、あるいは、入力デバイスを介して入力された電子番組表が電子番組表格納部２０で記憶されるようになってもよい。 The process of storing the electronic program guide in the electronic program guide storage unit 20 does not matter. For example, the electronic program guide may be stored in the electronic program guide storage unit 20 via a recording medium, and the electronic program guide transmitted via a communication line or the like is stored in the electronic program guide storage unit 20. Alternatively, the electronic program guide input via the input device may be stored in the electronic program guide storage unit 20.
　キー情報取得部２１、シーン判断部２２、番組種類取得部２３、移動手段情報取得部２４、番組補助情報取得部２５は、通常、ＭＰＵやメモリ等から実現され得る。キー情報取得部２１等の処理手順は、通常、ソフトウェアで実現され、当該ソフトウェアはＲＯＭ等の記録媒体に記録されている。但し、ハードウェア（専用回路）で実現しても良い。 The key information acquisition unit 21, the scene determination unit 22, the program type acquisition unit 23, the moving means information acquisition unit 24, and the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 can be usually realized by an MPU, a memory, or the like. The processing procedure of the key information acquisition unit 21 and the like is usually realized by software, and the software is recorded on a recording medium such as a ROM. However, it may be realized by hardware (dedicated circuit).
　番組補助情報出力部２６は、ディスプレイやスピーカー等の出力デバイスを含むと考えても含まないと考えても良い。番組補助情報出力部２６は、出力デバイスのドライバーソフトまたは、出力デバイスのドライバーソフトと出力デバイス等で実現され得る。 The program auxiliary information output unit 26 may be considered as including or not including an output device such as a display or a speaker. The program auxiliary information output unit 26 can be realized by driver software of an output device or driver software and an output device of an output device.
　次に、情報処理装置２の動作について、図７のフローチャートを用いて説明する。図７のフローチャートにおいて、図２のフローチャートと同一のステップについて、説明を省略する。 Next, the operation of the information processing apparatus 2 will be described using the flowchart of FIG. In the flowchart of FIG. 7, the description of the same steps as those in the flowchart of FIG. 2 is omitted.
　（ステップＳ７０１）キー情報取得部２１は、ステップＳ２０３で受信された番組関連情報から、１以上のキー情報を取得する。なお、ここで、キー情報取得部２１は、取得した１以上のキー情報を、ディスプレイ等に出力しても良い。 (Step S701) The key information acquisition unit 21 acquires one or more key information from the program related information received in step S203. Here, the key information acquisition unit 21 may output the acquired one or more key information to a display or the like.
　（ステップＳ７０２）番組補助情報取得部２５は、ステップＳ７０１で取得された１以上のキー情報を用いて、１種類以上の番組補助情報を取得する。番組補助情報の取得処理について、図８のフローチャートを用いて説明する。 (Step S702) The program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires one or more types of program auxiliary information using the one or more key information acquired in step S701. The program auxiliary information acquisition process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
　（ステップＳ７０３）番組補助情報出力部２６は、ステップＳ７０２で取得された１種類以上の番組補助情報を出力する。ステップＳ２０１に戻る。番組補助情報の出力処理について、図９のフローチャートを用いて説明する。 (Step S703) The program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs one or more types of program auxiliary information acquired in step S702. The process returns to step S201. Program auxiliary information output processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
　（ステップＳ７０４）受付部１２は、ユーザから指示を受け付けたか否かを判断する。指示を受け付けた場合はステップＳ７０５に行き、指示を受け付けない場合はステップＳ２０１に戻る。なお、ここでの指示は、出力されているキー報への指示である、とする。 (Step S704) The receiving unit 12 determines whether an instruction has been received from the user. When the instruction is accepted, the process goes to step S705, and when the instruction is not accepted, the process returns to step S201. It is assumed that the instruction here is an instruction to the output key information.
　（ステップＳ７０５）番組補助情報取得部２５は、ステップＳ７０４で受け付けられた指示に対応するキー報を取得する。 (Step S705) The program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires key information corresponding to the instruction received in step S704.
　（ステップＳ７０６）番組補助情報取得部２５は、ステップＳ７０５で取得したキー報に対応する１種類以上の番組補助情報を取得する。 (Step S706) The program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires one or more types of program auxiliary information corresponding to the key information acquired in step S705.
　（ステップＳ７０７）番組補助情報出力部２６は、ステップＳ７０６で取得された１種類以上の番組補助情報を出力する。ステップＳ２０１に戻る。 (Step S707) The program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs one or more types of program auxiliary information acquired in step S706. The process returns to step S201.
　なお、図７のフローチャートにおいて、取得されたキー情報が出力された。しかし、取得されたキー情報は出力されなくても良い。かかる場合、出力されているキー情報に対する指示は受け付けられない。 In the flowchart of FIG. 7, the acquired key information is output. However, the acquired key information may not be output. In such a case, an instruction for the output key information is not accepted.
　また、図７のフローチャートにおいて、電源オフや処理終了の割り込みにより処理は終了する。 Further, in the flowchart of FIG. 7, the processing is ended by powering off or interruption of processing end.
　次に、ステップＳ７０２の番組補助情報の取得処理について、図８のフローチャートを用いて説明する。 Next, the process of acquiring the program auxiliary information in step S702 will be described using the flowchart of FIG.
　（ステップＳ８０１）番組補助情報取得部２５は、取得された１以上のキー情報を図示しないバッファに一時蓄積する。 (Step S801) The program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 temporarily stores the acquired one or more key information in a buffer (not shown).
　（ステップＳ８０２）シーン判断部２２は、出力中の番組のシーンの切り換えが発生したか否かを判断する。シーンの切り換えが発生したと判断した場合はステップＳ７０６に行き、シーンの切り換えが発生していないと判断した場合はステップＳ８０３に行く。 (Step S802) The scene determination unit 22 determines whether a scene change of the program being output has occurred. If it is determined that scene switching has occurred, the process proceeds to step S706, and if it is determined that scene switching has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S803.
　（ステップＳ８０３）番組補助情報取得部２５は、図示しないバッファに一時蓄積されている１以上のキー情報を取得する。なお、かかる１以上のキー情報は、同じシーンの中で蓄積されたキー情報である。 (Step S803) The program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires one or more key information temporarily stored in a buffer (not shown). The one or more key information is key information accumulated in the same scene.
　（ステップＳ８０４）番組補助情報取得部２５は、ステップＳ８０３で取得された１以上のキー情報を用いて、空間的関係情報を取得する。番組補助情報取得部２５は、通常、地図情報を用いて、２つのキー情報の空間的関係情報を取得する。なお、番組補助情報取得部２５が空間的関係情報を取得する方法は、地点関連情報取得部１７が空間的関係情報を取得する方法と同様であるので、詳細な説明を省略する。 (Step S804) The program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires the spatial relationship information using the one or more key information acquired in Step S803. The program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 usually acquires spatial relationship information of two pieces of key information using map information. In addition, since the method in which the program supplementary information acquisition part 25 acquires spatial relationship information is the same as the method in which the spot relevant information acquisition part 17 acquires spatial relationship information, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.
　（ステップＳ８０５）番組補助情報取得部２５は、１以上の出力制御情報から、空間的関係情報に対応する説明パターン識別子を取得する。 (Step S805) The program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires an explanation pattern identifier corresponding to the spatial relationship information from one or more output control information.
　（ステップＳ８０６）番組補助情報取得部２５は、ステップＳ８０５で取得した説明パターン識別子に対応する１種類以上の番組補助情報であり、ステップＳ８０３で取得された１以上のキー情報に対応する番組補助情報を取得する。上位処理にリターンする。なお、１種類以上の番組補助情報は、例えば、ストリートビュー、地図情報、写真等のうちの１種類以上の情報である。 (Step S806) The program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 is one or more types of program auxiliary information corresponding to the explanation pattern identifier acquired in step S805, and program auxiliary information corresponding to the one or more key information acquired in step S803. To get. Return to upper process. Note that the one or more types of program auxiliary information are, for example, one or more types of information of street view, map information, photos, and the like.
　次に、ステップＳ７０３の番組補助情報の出力処理について、図９のフローチャートを用いて説明する。 Next, the program auxiliary information output process in step S703 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
　（ステップＳ９０１）移動手段情報取得部２４は、ステップＳ８０３で取得された２以上のキー情報を用いて、単位時間あたりの移動距離（移動速度）を算出する。次に、移動手段情報取得部２４は、移動速度に対応する移動手段情報を取得する。なお、ここで、移動手段情報取得部２４は、移動手段情報を取得できない場合があっても良い。 (Step S901) The movement means information acquisition unit 24 calculates a movement distance (movement speed) per unit time using the two or more key information acquired in Step S803. Next, the moving means information acquisition unit 24 acquires moving means information corresponding to the moving speed. Here, the movement means information acquisition unit 24 may not be able to acquire movement means information.
　（ステップＳ９０２）番組補助情報出力部２６は、番組出力部１５が出力している番組の番組識別子を取得する。そして、番組補助情報出力部２６は、番組識別子に対応する番組の種類（ジャンル）を、電子番組表格納部２０の電子番組表から取得する・ (Step S902) The program auxiliary information output unit 26 acquires the program identifier of the program output by the program output unit 15. Then, the program auxiliary information output unit 26 acquires the program type (genre) corresponding to the program identifier from the electronic program guide in the electronic program guide storage unit 20.
　（ステップＳ９０３）番組補助情報出力部２６は、ステップＳ９０１で取得した移動手段情報、およびステップＳ９０２で取得した番組の種類のうちの１以上の情報を用いて、出力する１種類以上の番組補助情報の出力レイアウトを決定する。 (Step S903) The program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs one or more types of program auxiliary information to be output using one or more pieces of information of the moving means information acquired in step S901 and the type of program acquired in step S902. Determine the output layout.
　（ステップＳ９０４）番組補助情報出力部２６は、ステップＳ９０３で決定した出力レイアウトに従って、番組補助情報取得部２５が取得した１種類以上の番組補助情報を出力する。上位処理にリターンする。 (Step S904) The program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs one or more types of program auxiliary information acquired by the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 in accordance with the output layout determined in step S903. Return to upper process.
　なお、図９のフローチャートにおいて、番組補助情報出力部２６は、移動手段情報や番組の種類を用いずに、番組補助情報を出力しても良い。 In the flowchart of FIG. 9, the program auxiliary information output unit 26 may output the program auxiliary information without using the moving means information and the type of program.
　以下、本実施の形態における情報処理装置２の具体的な動作について説明する。 Hereinafter, a specific operation of the information processing apparatus 2 in the present embodiment will be described.
　今、番組関連情報は、ＴＶ番組における字幕データである。また、取得するキー情報は、地点情報である。また、地点情報は、ここでは、通常、地名である。つまり、番組関連情報受信部１４は、出力されている番組の字幕データを取得する。 Now, the program related information is subtitle data in TV programs. The key information to be acquired is point information. The point information is usually a place name here. That is, the program related information receiving unit 14 acquires the caption data of the output program.
　また、キー情報取得部２１は、字幕データから地点情報を取得する。また、ここでは、シーン判断部２２は、取得したキー情報のうち、最も新しいキー情報を取得してから予め決められた時間（ここでは、１５秒）以上が経過した場合に、シーンが切り替わったと判断する。 Also, the key information acquisition unit 21 acquires point information from the caption data. In addition, here, the scene determination unit 22 assumes that the scene has switched when a predetermined time (in this case, 15 seconds) or more has elapsed since the acquisition of the latest key information among the acquired key information. to decide.
　また、番組種類取得部２３は、電子番組表から、出力中の番組のジャンルを取得する。ジャンルとは、ニュース、スポーツ、バラエティー、ドラマ等である。 Also, the program type acquisition unit 23 acquires the genre of the program being output from the electronic program guide. The genre includes news, sports, variety, drama and the like.
　また、移動手段情報取得部２４は、図１０に示す移動手段決定管理表を保持している。移動手段決定管理表は、移動手段を決定するための表である。移動手段決定管理表は、「速度」「地点情報」「移動手段」を有するレコードを１以上管理している。図１０において、例えば、「速度（ｘ）がａ１以下である場合、移動手段情報取得部２４は、移動手段情報「徒歩」を取得することを示す。また、図１０において、例えば、「速度（ｘ）がａ１より大きく、ａ２以下であり、かつ速度を決定する場合に用いた地点情報が「．＊駅」に合致する場合、移動手段情報取得部２４は、移動手段情報「電車」を取得することを示す。なお、「．＊駅」は最後の文字が「駅」である文字列である。さらに、図１０において、例えば、「速度（ｘ）がａ１より大きく、ａ３以下であり、かつ「電車」でない場合、移動手段情報取得部２４は、移動手段情報「自動車」を取得することを示す。 Further, the movement means information acquisition unit 24 holds a movement means determination management table shown in FIG. The moving means determination management table is a table for determining moving means. The moving means determination management table manages one or more records having “speed”, “point information”, and “moving means”. In FIG. 10, for example, “when the speed (x) is a 1 or less, the moving means information acquisition unit 24 acquires moving means information“ walking ”. Further, in FIG. 10, for example, when “the speed (x) is larger than a 1 and smaller than or equal to a 2 and the point information used when determining the speed matches“. * Station ”, the moving means information The acquisition unit 24 indicates that the moving means information “train” is acquired. Note that “. * Station” is a character string whose last character is “station”. Furthermore, in FIG. 10, for example, when “speed (x) is greater than a 1 and less than or equal to a 3 and is not a“ train ”, the moving means information acquisition unit 24 acquires the moving means information“ automobile ”. Indicates.
　また、番組補助情報取得部２５は、図１１に示す出力制御表を用いて、番組補助情報を取得する。さらに、番組補助情報出力部２６は、図１１に示す出力制御表を用いて、番組補助情報取得部２５が取得した１種類以上の番組補助情報を出力する。 Further, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires the program auxiliary information using the output control table shown in FIG. Further, the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs one or more types of program auxiliary information acquired by the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 using the output control table shown in FIG.
　今、番組補助情報取得部２５は、図１１に示す出力制御表を保持している、とする。ここでの出力制御表は、ストリートビューまたは／および地図情報または／および写真の出力態様を決定するための表であり、ストリートビューまたは／および地図情報または／および写真の出力を制御するための表である。 Now, it is assumed that the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 holds the output control table shown in FIG. The output control table here is a table for determining the output mode of street view or / and map information or / and photos, and is a table for controlling the output of street view or / and map information or / and photos. It is.
　出力制御表は、２つの地点情報が示す地点（ここでは、ＡとＢ）の空間的関係の情報を有する。空間的関係の情報とは、ここでは、包含関係、領域の広さ、および距離である。つまり、出力制御表は、包含関係、領域の広さ、および距離をパラメータとして、地点関連情報の出力を制御するための表である。なお、２つの地点情報は、番組関連情報に含まれる地点情報であり、同時または時間的に閾値以内に受信された番組関連情報に含まれる地点情報である。また、番組のシーンの切り替えの情報を番組関連情報が有する場合、２つの地点情報は、同一のシーンにおける番組関連情報に含まれる地点情報である。 The output control table has information on the spatial relationship between the points (here, A and B) indicated by the two point information. Here, the spatial relationship information includes the inclusion relationship, the area size, and the distance. That is, the output control table is a table for controlling the output of the spot related information using the inclusion relation, the area width, and the distance as parameters. Note that the two pieces of spot information are spot information included in the program-related information and are spot information included in the program-related information received within the threshold value simultaneously or temporally. In addition, when the program related information includes information on switching the program scene, the two pieces of point information are point information included in the program related information in the same scene.
　また、出力制御表は、「空間的関係ＩＤ」「空間的関係情報」「空間的関係」「説明パターン」「出力制御」を有する。「空間的関係ＩＤ」は、２つの地点情報が示す地点（ここでは、ＡとＢ）の空間的な関係を示す識別子である。「空間的関係情報」は、２つの地点情報が示す地点（ここでは、ＡとＢ）の空間的な関係を示す情報である。「空間的関係」は「空間的関係情報」を決定するための情報であり、ここでは「包含関係」「領域の広さ」「距離」を有する。つまり、ここでは、ＡとＢとの領域の包含関係、ＡおよびＢの領域の広さ、ＡとＢとの距離を用いて、ＡとＢとの空間的関係が決定される。「説明パターン」は、番組の補助態様を示す。「説明パターン」が決まれば、出力される番組補助情報の種類および出力態様が決定される。番組補助情報の種類は、ここでは、ストリートビュー、地図、写真のうちの１以上である。なお、空間的関係とは地理的関係とも言う。また、「出力制御」とは、出力する番組関連情報、および出力態様を示す。「出力制御」は、ストリートビューの出力態様を示す「ストリートビュー制御」、地図の出力態様を示す「地図制御」、写真の出力態様を示す「写真制御」を有する。 Also, the output control table has “spatial relationship ID”, “spatial relationship information”, “spatial relationship”, “explanation pattern”, and “output control”. The “spatial relationship ID” is an identifier that indicates a spatial relationship between points (here, A and B) indicated by two pieces of point information. “Spatial relationship information” is information indicating the spatial relationship between the points (here, A and B) indicated by the two point information. “Spatial relationship” is information for determining “spatial relationship information”, and has “inclusion relationship”, “area width”, and “distance” here. That is, here, the spatial relationship between A and B is determined using the inclusion relation of the regions A and B, the width of the regions A and B, and the distance between A and B. “Description pattern” indicates an auxiliary mode of the program. If the “description pattern” is determined, the type and output mode of the program auxiliary information to be output is determined. Here, the type of program auxiliary information is one or more of street view, map, and photograph. Spatial relationship is also called geographical relationship. “Output control” indicates program-related information to be output and an output mode. The “output control” includes “street view control” indicating the output mode of the street view, “map control” indicating the output mode of the map, and “photo control” indicating the output mode of the photograph.
　地点情報が示す地名はそれぞれ領域を持っている。例えば、都道府県や市町村など領域の広さはそれぞれ異なる。本具体例では、番組補助情報取得部２５は、時系列に沿って前後関係にある二つの地名における領域関係を判定する。番組補助情報取得部２５は、地名の領域の関係抽出には9-intersection（「倉田洋平．地理情報科学における位相的空間関係の研究と今後の課題．GIS －理論と応用，Vol. 18, No. 2, pp. 41-51 (2010)」参照）という公知技術を用いる。 Each place name indicated by the point information has an area. For example, areas such as prefectures and municipalities are different. In this specific example, the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 determines the region relationship between the two place names that are in a chronological relationship along the time series. The program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 uses 9-intersection (“Yohei Kurata. Topological spatial relation research and future issues in geographic information science. GIS -Theory and application, Vol. 18, No 2, pp. 41-51 (2010) ”).
　なお、9-intersectionでは、２つの地点の関係を９つのパターンに分類している。しかし、本具体例において、地理的な領域の境界の重複は番組構成においては重要ではないと考え、領域の境界の重複の有無を考慮せず、9-intersectionを変更している。 In 9-intersection, the relationship between two points is classified into nine patterns. However, in this specific example, overlapping of geographical area boundaries is not important in the program structure, and 9-intersection is changed without considering the overlapping of area boundaries.
　以下、本具体例における２つの地点の地理的関係の定義と例を説明する。図１１の包含関係「一致（Ａ＝Ｂ）」とは完全にＡおよびＢの地名が一致する場合である。例えば、「九州」という地名が出現した後に同じ「九州」という地名が出現した場合は、番組補助情報取得部２５は「一致」と判定する。 Hereinafter, the definition and example of the geographical relationship between two points in this specific example will be described. The inclusion relationship “match (A = B)” in FIG. 11 is a case where the place names of A and B completely match. For example, when the same place name “Kyushu” appears after the place name “Kyushu” appears, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 determines “match”.
　また、「分離」とは完全に二つの地名の領域が離れている場合である。例えば、「福岡県」と「鹿児島県」という地名は完全に分離しているので、番組補助情報取得部２５は「分離」という地理的関係である判定する。そして、番組補助情報取得部２５は、空間的関係情報「equal」を取得する。 In addition, “separation” is when the area of two place names is completely separated. For example, since the place names “Fukuoka Prefecture” and “Kagoshima Prefecture” are completely separated, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 determines that the geographical relationship is “separation”. And the program supplementary information acquisition part 25 acquires spatial relationship information "equal".
　また、「分離」の場合、番組補助情報取得部２５は、２つの地点の距離、および領域の広さにより、さらに「分離」という関係を詳細に分類する。つまり、番組補助情報取得部２５は、包含関係「分離」であり、２つの地点の距離が閾値より近い近傍である場合と、閾値より遠い遠方の場合の二種類が存在するとして、「分離」という関係をさらに詳細に分類する。また、番組補助情報取得部２５は、２つの各地点の領域の広さが閾値より広い広域の場合と、閾値より狭い境域の場合の二種類が存在するとして、「分離」という関係をさらに詳細に分類する。そして、包含関係「分離」、領域の広さが閾値より広い「広い」、２つの各地点の距離が閾値より近い「近い」の場合は、番組補助情報取得部２５は、空間的関係情報「disjoin-n（広域）」を取得する。また、包含関係「分離」、領域の広さが閾値より広い「広い」、２つの各地点の距離が閾値より遠い「遠い」の場合は、番組補助情報取得部２５は、空間的関係情報「disjoin-f（広域）」を取得する。また、包含関係「分離」、領域の広さが閾値より狭い「狭い」、２つの各地点の距離が閾値より近い「近い」の場合は、番組補助情報取得部２５は、空間的関係情報「disjoin-n（狭域）」を取得する。さらに、包含関係「分離」、領域の広さが閾値より狭い「狭い」、２つの各地点の距離が閾値より遠い「遠い」の場合は、番組補助情報取得部２５は、空間的関係情報「disjoin-f（狭域）」を取得する。 Also, in the case of “separation”, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 further classifies the relationship of “separation” in detail according to the distance between two points and the area size. That is, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 has the inclusion relationship “separation”, and there are two types of cases where the distance between the two points is nearer than the threshold and when the distance is farther than the threshold. This relationship is further classified in detail. Further, the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 further details the relationship of “separation” on the assumption that there are two types of areas, that is, a wide area where the area of each of the two points is wider than the threshold and a boundary where the area is narrower than the threshold. Classify into: When the inclusion relationship is “separation”, the area is “wide” that is wider than the threshold, and the distance between the two points is “close” that is closer than the threshold, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 selects the spatial relationship information “ "disjoin-n (wide area)" is acquired. In addition, when the inclusion relationship is “separation”, the area is “wide” wider than the threshold, and the distance between the two points is “far” farther than the threshold, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 selects the spatial relationship information “ "disjoin-f (wide area)" is acquired. When the inclusion relationship is “separation”, the area is “narrow” where the area is narrower than the threshold, and the distance between the two points is “near” closer than the threshold, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 selects the spatial relationship information “ get “disjoin-n”. Further, in the case of the inclusion relationship “separation”, the area width is “narrow” which is narrower than the threshold, and the distance between the two points is “far” which is far from the threshold, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 selects the spatial relationship information “ "disjoin-f (narrow area)" is acquired.
　例えば、「福岡県」と「鹿児島県」という地名は完全に分離しているので、番組補助情報取得部２５は、包含関係「分離」という地理的関係と判定する。また、例えば、「福岡県」と「鹿児島県」とは遠く、かつ各地点は広域であると判断し、番組補助情報取得部２５は、空間的関係情報「disjoin-f（広域）」を取得する。なお、距離の判断には、番組のジャンルごと、または番組毎に閾値を設定しても良い。 For example, since the place names “Fukuoka Prefecture” and “Kagoshima Prefecture” are completely separated, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 determines that the geographical relationship is the inclusion relationship “separation”. Further, for example, it is determined that “Fukuoka Prefecture” and “Kagoshima Prefecture” are far from each other and each point is a wide area, and the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires the spatial relation information “disjoin-f (wide area)”. To do. In determining the distance, a threshold may be set for each program genre or for each program.
　また、包含関係「外接触」とは二つの地名の領域の境界の一部が重複している場合である。例えば、「福岡県」と「佐賀県」は隣接しているので、これらの地名の包含関係「外接触」となり、番組補助情報取得部２５は、空間的関係情報「meet」を取得する。 In addition, the inclusion relationship “outside contact” is a case where a part of the boundary between two place name areas overlaps. For example, since “Fukuoka Prefecture” and “Saga Prefecture” are adjacent to each other, the inclusion relationship of these place names becomes “outside contact”, and the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires the spatial relationship information “meet”.
　また、包含関係「重複」とは二つの地名の領域の一部に重複がある場合である。例えば、「人吉市」と「球磨川」という二つの地名の関係は「重複」であるので、これらの地名の包含関係「重複」となり、番組補助情報取得部２５は、空間的関係情報「overlap」を取得する。 In addition, the inclusion relationship “duplicate” is when there is an overlap in part of the area of two place names. For example, since the relationship between two place names “Hitoyoshi City” and “Kuma River” is “overlap”, the inclusion relation of these place names becomes “overlap”, and the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 uses the spatial relationship information “overlap”. Is obtained.
　また、包含関係「内包」とは、ＡとＢとの地名が包含関係（Ａ⊃Ｂ）にあるということである。例えば、「福岡県」と「博多駅」という二つの地名の関係を順次、抽出すると、「福岡県」の中に「博多駅」を含むという包含関係にあるので、番組補助情報取得部２５は、空間的関係情報「contains」を取得する。 Also, the inclusion relationship “inclusive” means that the place names of A and B are in the inclusion relationship (A⊃B). For example, if the relationship between two place names “Fukuoka Prefecture” and “Hakata Station” is extracted sequentially, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 includes “Hakata Station” in “Fukuoka Prefecture”. , Get spatial relation information “contains”.
　さらに、包含関係「内在」とは、ＡとＢとの地名が内在する関係（Ａ⊂Ｂ）にあるということである。例えば、「博多駅」という地名の後に「福岡県」という地名が出現した場合、「博多駅」は「福岡県」の領域中に存在しているので、番組補助情報取得部２５は、空間的関係情報「inside」を取得する。 Furthermore, the inclusion relationship “inherent” means that the place name of A and B is in an inherent relationship (A⊂B). For example, when the place name “Fukuoka Prefecture” appears after the place name “Hakata Station”, since “Hakata Station” exists in the area of “Fukuoka Prefecture”, the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 spatially Get related information "inside".
　以上、図１１によれば、番組補助情報取得部２５は、２つの地点の包含関係、領域の広さ、および距離を用いて、２つの地点の空間的関係を９つのパターンに分類し得る。そして、番組補助情報取得部２５は、９つの各空間的関係に対する説明パターンを図１１に示すように決定し得る。 As described above, according to FIG. 11, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 can classify the spatial relationship between the two points into nine patterns using the inclusion relationship between the two points, the area width, and the distance. And the program supplementary information acquisition part 25 can determine the description pattern with respect to each nine spatial relationships as shown in FIG.
　つまり、空間的関係「equal」「contains」の場合、説明パターンは、当該１または２つの地点を説明する「地点説明」である。「地点説明」には、「equal」に対応する「地点説明（１）」、「contains」に対応する「地点説明（２）」の２種類がある。「地点説明（１）」について、番組補助情報取得部２５は一の地点を含む地図を取得し、番組補助情報出力部２６は当該地図を出力する。また、番組補助情報取得部２５は一の地点に対応する写真を取得し、番組補助情報出力部２６は当該写真を出力する。「地点説明（２）」について、番組補助情報取得部２５はＡの地図を取得し、番組補助情報出力部２６はＡの地図を出力する。次に、番組補助情報取得部２５はＢの地図を取得し、番組補助情報出力部２６はＡの地図からＢの地図にズームインするように、Ｂの地図を出力する。また、「地点説明（２）」について、番組補助情報取得部２５はＡの写真を取得し、番組補助情報出力部２６はＡの写真を出力する。次に、番組補助情報取得部２５はＢの写真を取得し、番組補助情報出力部２６はＢの写真を出力する。 That is, in the case of the spatial relationship “equal” and “contains”, the explanation pattern is “point explanation” explaining the one or two places. There are two types of “point explanation”: “point explanation (1)” corresponding to “equal” and “point explanation (2)” corresponding to “contains”. For “point explanation (1)”, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires a map including one point, and the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs the map. Moreover, the program supplementary information acquisition part 25 acquires the photograph corresponding to one point, and the program supplementary information output part 26 outputs the said photograph. For “point explanation (2)”, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires the map of A, and the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs the map of A. Next, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires a map of B, and the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs the map of B so as to zoom in from the map of A to the map of B. In addition, regarding “point explanation (2)”, the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires the A photograph, and the program supplementary information output unit 26 outputs the A photograph. Next, the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires the B photograph, and the program supplementary information output unit 26 outputs the B photograph.
　また、空間的関係「disjoin-n（広域）」「disjoin-f（広域）」「meet」の場合、説明パターンは、当該２つの地点（ＡとＢ）を比較して説明する「地点比較」である。「地点比較」について、番組補助情報取得部２５はＡとＢとを含む地図を取得し、番組補助情報出力部２６は当該地図を出力する。また、「地点比較」について、番組補助情報取得部２５はＡの写真を取得し、番組補助情報出力部２６は当該Ａの写真を出力する。そして、その後、番組補助情報取得部２５はＢの写真を取得し、番組補助情報出力部２６は当該Ｂの写真を出力する。 Further, in the case of the spatial relationship “disjoin-n (wide area)”, “disjoin-f (wide area)”, and “meet”, the explanation pattern is “point comparison” that is explained by comparing the two points (A and B). It is. For “point comparison”, the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires a map including A and B, and the program supplementary information output unit 26 outputs the map. In addition, regarding the “point comparison”, the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires the A photograph, and the program supplementary information output unit 26 outputs the A photograph. After that, the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires the B photograph, and the program supplementary information output unit 26 outputs the B photograph.
　また、空間的関係「disjoin-n（狭域）」「disjoin-f（狭域）」の場合、説明パターンは、当該２つの地点への経路を説明する「経路説明」である。「経路説明」について、番組補助情報出力部２６は、ここでは、地図とストリートビューとを用いて、二つの地点間の経路を出力する。つまり、番組補助情報取得部２５は、二つの地名（ＡとＢ）を含む地図を取得する。そして、番組補助情報取得部２５は、公知の経路探索技術により、ＡからＢへの経路を探索し経路情報を取得する。そして、番組補助情報出力部２６は、取得された地図を出力し、かつ当該地図上に、経路情報で示される経路を出力する。また、番組補助情報取得部２５は、経路情報で示される経路に沿って、経路上の各地点のストリートビューを取得する。そして、番組補助情報出力部２６は、順次、番組補助情報取得部２５が取得したストリートビューを出力する。また、番組補助情報取得部２５と番組補助情報出力部２６とは、開始地点（Ａ）と終了地点（Ｂ）ではカメラを所定角度（例えば、１８０度）回転させ、周囲の様子を見渡す演出を施すことは好適である。 Also, in the case of the spatial relationship “disjoin-n (narrow area)” and “disjoin-f (narrow area)”, the explanation pattern is “route explanation” explaining the route to the two points. Regarding “route explanation”, the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs a route between two points using a map and a street view here. That is, the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires a map including two place names (A and B). And the program supplementary information acquisition part 25 searches the path | route from A to B with a well-known route search technique, and acquires route information. And the program supplementary information output part 26 outputs the acquired map, and outputs the path | route shown by path | route information on the said map. Moreover, the program supplementary information acquisition part 25 acquires the street view of each point on a path | route along the path | route shown by path | route information. And the program supplementary information output part 26 outputs the street view which the program supplementary information acquisition part 25 acquired sequentially. In addition, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 and the program auxiliary information output unit 26 rotate the camera by a predetermined angle (for example, 180 degrees) at the start point (A) and the end point (B) to produce an effect of looking around the surroundings. It is preferable to apply.
　さらに、空間的関係「overlap」「inside」の場合、説明パターンは、当該２つの地点を含む地域を説明する「地域説明」である。「地域説明」は、「地域説明（１）」と「地域説明（２）」とがある。「地域説明（１）」について、番組補助情報取得部２５は、ＡとＢとの重複領域を含む地図を取得し、番組補助情報出力部２６は当該地図を出力する。また、番組補助情報取得部２５は、ＡとＢとの重複領域の写真を取得し、番組補助情報出力部２６は当該写真を出力する。「地域説明（２）」について、番組補助情報取得部２５は、ＡとＢの地図を取得し、番組補助情報出力部２６はＡの地図を出力した後、Ａの地図からＢの地図にズームインするように、Ｂの地図を出力する。また、番組補助情報取得部２５は、ＡとＢの写真を取得し、番組補助情報出力部２６はＡの写真を出力した後、Ｂの写真を出力する。 Furthermore, in the case of the spatial relationship “overlap” and “inside”, the explanation pattern is “region explanation” explaining the region including the two points. “Region explanation” includes “Region explanation (1)” and “Region explanation (2)”. For “Region Description (1)”, the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires a map including an overlapping area of A and B, and the program supplementary information output unit 26 outputs the map. Moreover, the program supplementary information acquisition part 25 acquires the photograph of the duplication area | region of A and B, and the program supplementary information output part 26 outputs the said photograph. For “Region Description (2)”, the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires the map of A and B, and the program supplementary information output unit 26 outputs the map of A, and then zooms in the map of B from the map of A As shown, the map of B is output. Moreover, the program supplementary information acquisition part 25 acquires the photograph of A and B, and the program supplementary information output part 26 outputs the photograph of B, after outputting the photograph of A.
　以上より、番組補助情報出力部２６は、図１１の表を用いて、番組補助情報取得部２５が取得した１または２種類以上の番組補助情報を、図１１の説明パターンに対応する１または２種類以上の番組補助情報を、「ストリートビュー制御」「地図制御」および「写真制御」のうちの１以上の情報を用いて出力する。
（実験） As described above, the program auxiliary information output unit 26 uses the table of FIG. 11 to display one or more types of program auxiliary information acquired by the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 as 1 or 2 corresponding to the explanation pattern of FIG. More than one type of program auxiliary information is output using one or more pieces of information of “street view control”, “map control”, and “photo control”.
(Experiment)
　以下、情報処理装置２が具体的な番組を出力しているテレビである場合の、情報処理装置２の実験結果について説明する。 Hereinafter, the experimental results of the information processing apparatus 2 when the information processing apparatus 2 is a television that outputs a specific program will be described.
　今、実際の番組である「超豪華列車誕生　九州・美しの国を行く」（インターネットＵＲＬ「http://www.nhk.or.jp/hakken/kyushu/program/tetsudo.html」参照） の一部に行った演出について説明する。 Now, the actual program “Birth of a super luxury train, going to Kyushu and the beautiful country” (see Internet URL “http://www.nhk.or.jp/hakken/kyushu/program/tetsudo.html”) I will explain some of the performances I did.
　今、番組受信部１３は、上記の番組を受信する。また、番組関連情報受信部１４は、当該番組の番組関連情報である字幕データを受信する。そして、番組出力部１５は番組を出力している。 Now, the program receiving unit 13 receives the above program. Further, the program related information receiving unit 14 receives subtitle data which is program related information of the program. The program output unit 15 outputs a program.
　そして、キー情報取得部２１は、字幕データから、予め決められたカテゴリーに属する用語である地点情報を取得した、とする。ここで、キー情報取得部２１は、「九州」→「福岡」→「大分」→「慈恩の滝」→「大分」→「由布院駅」→「伽藍岳」→「九州」→「福岡」→「鹿児島」→「嘉例川駅」という順序で、キー情報である地点情報を順次、取得した、とする（図１２参照）。また、キー情報取得部２１は、ここでは、キー情報と時間情報とを一緒に取得する、とする。なお、図１２において、出力されている番組を構成する画像（１２０１）、取得された地点情報とその時間情報（１２０２）、２つの地点情報が示す２つの地点の空間的関係（１２０３）が記載されている。また、時間情報とは、キー情報が出現する時を特定する情報である。 Then, it is assumed that the key information acquisition unit 21 has acquired point information that is a term belonging to a predetermined category from the caption data. Here, the key information acquisition unit 21 is “Kyushu” → “Fukuoka” → “Oita” → “Jien no Taki” → “Oita” → “Yufuin Station” → “Mt. It is assumed that point information as key information is sequentially acquired in the order of “Kagoshima” → “Kaegyogawa Station” (see FIG. 12). Here, it is assumed that the key information acquisition unit 21 acquires key information and time information together. In FIG. 12, the image (1201) constituting the output program, the acquired spot information and its time information (1202), and the spatial relationship (1203) between the two spots indicated by the two spot information are described. Has been. Further, the time information is information that specifies when key information appears.
　ここで、シーン判断部２２は、一つ目の地点情報が出現してから１５秒以内に次の地名が出現した場合に同一シーンと判断する、とする。 Here, it is assumed that the scene determination unit 22 determines the same scene when the next place name appears within 15 seconds after the first point information appears.
　次に、番組補助情報取得部２５は、最初の地点情報「九州」を用いて、「九州」単体での演出を行うように、番組補助情報を取得する。なお、ここで、一地点単体の演出とは、当該地点の地図情報と写真を出力することである、とする。 Next, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires the program auxiliary information using the first point information “Kyushu” so that the performance of “Kyushu” alone is performed. Here, the effect of a single point is to output map information and a photograph of the point.
　つまり、番組補助情報取得部２５は、「九州」の縮尺の地図を地図情報格納部１０またはＷｅｂ上から取得する。そして、番組補助情報出力部２６は、「九州」の縮尺の地図を地図の出力する領域に表示する。図１３の画面（ａ）の１３０１が表示されている地図である。また、１３０２は表示されている番組、１３０３は取得され、表示されている地点情報である。次に、番組補助情報取得部２５は、キー情報「九州」を用いて写真を検索し、取得する。なお、写真の集合は、情報処理装置２が図示しない記録媒体に保持していても良いし、Ｗｅｂから検索しても良い。そして、番組補助情報出力部２６は、次の地点情報が出現するまでの間、「九州」に関する写真を出力する（図１３の１３０４参照）。 That is, the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires a map of the scale of “Kyushu” from the map information storage unit 10 or the Web. Then, the program supplementary information output unit 26 displays a map of “Kyushu” on a map output area. It is the map where 1301 of the screen (a) of FIG. 13 is displayed. Reference numeral 1302 denotes a displayed program, and 1303 denotes point information acquired and displayed. Next, the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 searches for and acquires a photograph using the key information “Kyushu”. Note that the set of photos may be stored in a recording medium (not shown) by the information processing apparatus 2 or may be retrieved from the Web. Then, the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs a photograph relating to “Kyushu” until the next spot information appears (see 1304 in FIG. 13).
　次に、キー情報取得部２１は、「福岡」という地点情報を取得する。そして、番組補助情報取得部２５は、「九州」と「福岡」との空間的関係情報「contains」を取得する。そして、番組補助情報取得部２５は、空間的関係情報「contains」に対応する説明パターン「地点説明（２）」に従って、「福岡」の地図を取得する。そして、番組補助情報出力部２６は、「九州」の領域から「福岡」の領域までズームインする地図情報を出力する（図１３の１３０５参照）。 Next, the key information acquisition unit 21 acquires point information “Fukuoka”. Then, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires the spatial relationship information “contains” between “Kyushu” and “Fukuoka”. Then, the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires a map of “Fukuoka” according to the explanation pattern “point explanation (2)” corresponding to the spatial relation information “contains”. Then, the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs map information for zooming in from the “Kyushu” area to the “Fukuoka” area (see 1305 in FIG. 13).
　次に、番組補助情報取得部２５は、「福岡」をキーにして、写真を取得する。そして、番組補助情報出力部２６は、当該「福岡」の写真を出力する（図１３の１３０６参照）。 Next, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires a photograph using “Fukuoka” as a key. Then, the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs the photograph of “Fukuoka” (see 1306 in FIG. 13).
　次に、字幕データに「福岡」という地点情報が出現した後、すぐに「大分」という地点情報が出現した。そして、キー情報取得部２１は、「大分」を取得する。 Next, the spot information “Oita” appeared immediately after the spot information “Fukuoka” appeared in the caption data. Then, the key information acquisition unit 21 acquires “Oita”.
　次に、番組補助情報取得部２５は、ここでの「大分」は「大分県」と判定し、この二つの地名の領域関係に基づき、「福岡」disjoint「大分」という包含関係を抽出する。つまり、番組補助情報取得部２５は、包含関係「disjoint」を取得する。また、番組補助情報取得部２５は、地図情報格納部１０の地図情報を用いて、「福岡」「大分」は、閾値より狭い「狭域」であり、閾値より広い距離が遠い「遠い」と判断した、とする。つまり、番組補助情報取得部２５は、空間的関係情報「disjoint-f（狭域）」を取得する。 Next, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 determines that “Oita” is “Oita Prefecture”, and extracts an inclusion relationship “Fukuoka” disjoint “Oita” based on the area relationship of these two place names. That is, the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires the inclusion relationship “disjoint”. Further, the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 uses the map information in the map information storage unit 10 to indicate that “Fukuoka” and “Oita” are “narrow areas” narrower than the threshold, and “far” that is far from the threshold. Assume that you have made a decision. That is, the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires spatial relationship information “disjoint-f (narrow region)”.
　次に、番組補助情報取得部２５は、「disjoint-f（狭域）」に対応する説明パターン「経路説明」に従って、「福岡」「大分」を含む地図を取得する。また、番組補助情報取得部２５は、「福岡」から「大分」への経路探索を行い、経路情報を取得する。また、番組補助情報取得部２５は、当該経路情報に対応する各地点のストリートビューを順次取得する。そして、番組補助情報出力部２６は、「福岡」「大分」を含む地図を出力し、かつ当該地図上に、「福岡」から「大分」への経路探索を出力する（１３０７参照）。また、番組補助情報出力部２６は、「福岡」から「大分」への経路を示すように、経路情報に対応する各地点のストリートビューを順次出力する（１３０８参照）。 Next, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires a map including “Fukuoka” and “Oita” according to the explanation pattern “route explanation” corresponding to “disjoint-f (narrow area)”. The program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 searches for a route from “Fukuoka” to “Oita” and acquires route information. Moreover, the program supplementary information acquisition part 25 acquires sequentially the street view of each point corresponding to the said route information. Then, the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs a map including “Fukuoka” and “Oita”, and outputs a route search from “Fukuoka” to “Oita” on the map (see 1307). In addition, the program auxiliary information output unit 26 sequentially outputs the street view of each point corresponding to the route information so as to indicate the route from “Fukuoka” to “Oita” (see 1308).
　次に、シーン判断部２２は、直前の地点情報「大分」の取得から１５秒以上経過していることを検知し、シーンが切り替わったと判断する。 Next, the scene determination unit 22 detects that 15 seconds or more have elapsed since the acquisition of the previous point information “Oita”, and determines that the scene has been switched.
　そして、次に、キー情報取得部２１は、地点情報「慈恩の滝」を取得する。そして、番組補助情報取得部２５等は、「慈恩の滝」単体での演出を行う。つまり、番組補助情報取得部２５は、「慈恩の滝」を含む地図を取得する。そして、番組補助情報出力部２６は当該地図を出力する。また、番組補助情報取得部２５は、「慈恩の滝」の写真を取得する。そして、番組補助情報出力部２６は当該写真を出力する。 Next, the key information acquisition unit 21 acquires the point information “Jien no Taki”. Then, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 and the like perform the performance of “Jien no Taki” alone. That is, the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires a map including “Citizen Falls”. Then, the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs the map. Further, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires a picture of “Citizen Falls”. And the program supplementary information output part 26 outputs the said photograph.
　次に、字幕データに、「大分」と「由布院駅」という地点情報がほぼ同時に出現した、とする。番組補助情報取得部２５は、ここでの「大分」は「大分市」と判定する、とする。番組補助情報取得部２５は、「大分」「由布院駅」における包含関係「disjoint」を取得する。また、番組補助情報取得部２５は、地図情報格納部１０の地図情報を用いて、「大分」「由布院駅」は、閾値より狭い「狭域」であり、閾値より広い距離が近い「近い」と判断した、とする。つまり、番組補助情報取得部２５は、空間的関係情報「disjoint-n（狭域）」を取得する。 Next, it is assumed that the spot information “Oita” and “Yufuin Station” appears almost simultaneously in the caption data. It is assumed that the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 determines that “Oita” is “Oita city”. The program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires the inclusion relationship “disjoint” in “Oita” and “Yufuin Station”. Further, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 uses the map information stored in the map information storage unit 10, and “Oita” and “Yufuin Station” are “narrow areas” narrower than the threshold and “near” a distance wider than the threshold. Suppose that That is, the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires spatial relation information “disjoint-n (narrow region)”.
　次に、番組補助情報取得部２５は、「disjoint-n（狭域）」に対応する説明パターン「経路説明」に従って、「大分」「由布院駅」を含む地図を取得する。また、番組補助情報取得部２５は、「大分」から「由布院駅」への経路探索を行い、経路情報を取得する。また、番組補助情報取得部２５は、当該経路情報に対応する各地点のストリートビューを順次取得する。そして、番組補助情報出力部２６は、「大分」「由布院駅」を含む地図を出力し、かつ当該地図上に、「大分」から「由布院駅」への経路探索を出力する（１３１１参照）。また、番組補助情報出力部２６は、「大分」から「由布院駅」への経路を示すように、経路情報に対応する各地点のストリートビューを順次出力する（１３１２参照）。 Next, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires a map including “Oita” and “Yufuin Station” according to the explanation pattern “route explanation” corresponding to “disjoint-n (narrow area)”. The program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 searches for a route from “Oita” to “Yufuin Station” and acquires route information. Moreover, the program supplementary information acquisition part 25 acquires sequentially the street view of each point corresponding to the said route information. Then, the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs a map including “Oita” and “Yufuin Station”, and outputs a route search from “Oita” to “Yufuin Station” on the map (see 1311). Further, the program auxiliary information output unit 26 sequentially outputs the street view of each point corresponding to the route information so as to indicate the route from “Oita” to “Yufuin Station” (see 1312).
　次に、キー情報取得部２１は、キー情報「伽藍岳」を取得する。次に、シーン判断部２２は、シーンの切り替わりが発生していない、と判断する。「由布院駅」の出現から１５秒以上、経過していないからである。次に、番組補助情報取得部２５は、「由布院駅」disjoint「伽藍岳」という包含関係を検知する。次に、番組補助情報取得部２５は、地図情報格納部１０の地図情報を用いて、「由布院駅」「伽藍岳」は、閾値より狭い「狭域」であり、閾値より広い距離が近い「近い」と判断した、とする。つまり、番組補助情報取得部２５は、空間的関係情報「disjoint-n（狭域）」を取得する。 Next, the key information acquisition unit 21 acquires key information “Mt. Next, the scene determination unit 22 determines that no scene change has occurred. This is because it has not passed more than 15 seconds since the appearance of “Yufuin Station”. Next, the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 detects an inclusion relationship of “Yufuin Station” disjoint “Mt. Next, the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 uses the map information in the map information storage unit 10, and “Yufuin Station” and “Mt. Kanai” are “narrow areas” that are narrower than the threshold, and a distance that is wider than the threshold is “close” ”. That is, the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires spatial relation information “disjoint-n (narrow region)”.
　次に、番組補助情報取得部２５は、「disjoint-n（狭域）」に対応する説明パターン「経路説明」に従って、「由布院駅」「伽藍岳」を含む地図を取得する。また、番組補助情報取得部２５は、「由布院駅」から「伽藍岳」への経路探索を行い、経路情報を取得する。また、番組補助情報取得部２５は、当該経路情報に対応する各地点のストリートビューを順次取得する。そして、番組補助情報出力部２６は、「由布院駅」「伽藍岳」を含む地図を出力し、かつ当該地図上に、「由布院駅」から「伽藍岳」への経路探索を出力する（１３１３参照）。また、番組補助情報出力部２６は、「由布院駅」から「伽藍岳」への経路を示すように、経路情報に対応する各地点のストリートビューを順次出力する（１３１４参照）。 Next, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires a map including “Yufuin Station” and “Mt. Kanai” according to the explanation pattern “route explanation” corresponding to “disjoint-n (narrow area)”. Further, the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 searches for a route from “Yufuin Station” to “Mt. Moreover, the program supplementary information acquisition part 25 acquires sequentially the street view of each point corresponding to the said route information. Then, the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs a map including “Yufuin Station” and “Mt. Kanai”, and outputs a route search from “Yufuin Station” to “Mt. Mt. Arai” on the map (see 1313). Further, the program auxiliary information output unit 26 sequentially outputs the street view of each point corresponding to the route information so as to indicate the route from “Yufuin Station” to “Mt.
　次に、キー情報取得部２１は、キー情報「九州」を取得する。次に、シーン判断部２２は、シーンの切り替わりが発生している、と判断する。そして、番組補助情報取得部２５等は、「九州」単体での演出を再度行う（図１３の（ｇ）参照）。かかる演出は、既に説明したので、再度の説明を省略する。 Next, the key information acquisition unit 21 acquires key information “Kyushu”. Next, the scene determination unit 22 determines that a scene change has occurred. And the program supplementary information acquisition part 25 grade | etc., Again performs the production | presentation by "Kyushu" alone (refer (g) of FIG. 13). Since this production has already been described, the description thereof will be omitted.
　次に、キー情報取得部２１は、キー情報「福岡」を取得する。次に、シーン判断部２２は、シーンの切り替わりが発生していない、と判断する。そして、番組補助情報取得部２５は、「九州」と「福岡」との空間的関係情報「contains」を取得する。そして、番組補助情報取得部２５は、空間的関係情報「contains」に対応する説明パターン「地点説明（２）」に従って、「福岡」の地図を取得する。そして、番組補助情報出力部２６は、「九州」の領域から「福岡」の領域までズームインする地図情報を出力する（図１３（ｈ）の１３１５参照）。 Next, the key information acquisition unit 21 acquires key information “Fukuoka”. Next, the scene determination unit 22 determines that no scene change has occurred. Then, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires the spatial relationship information “contains” between “Kyushu” and “Fukuoka”. Then, the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires a map of “Fukuoka” according to the explanation pattern “point explanation (2)” corresponding to the spatial relation information “contains”. Then, the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs map information for zooming in from the “Kyushu” area to the “Fukuoka” area (see 1315 in FIG. 13H).
　次に、番組補助情報取得部２５は、「福岡」をキーにして、写真を取得する。そして、番組補助情報出力部２６は、当該「福岡」の写真を出力する（図１３（ｈ）の１３１６参照）。 Next, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires a photograph using “Fukuoka” as a key. And the program supplementary information output part 26 outputs the photograph of the said "Fukuoka" (refer 1316 of FIG.13 (h)).
　次に、キー情報取得部２１は、キー情報「鹿児島」を取得する。次に、シーン判断部２２は、シーンの切り替わりが発生していない、と判断する。そして、番組補助情報取得部２５は、「福岡」と「鹿児島」との包含関係「disjoint」を取得する。また、番組補助情報取得部２５は、地図情報格納部１０の地図情報を用いて、「福岡」「鹿児島」は、閾値より狭い「狭域」であり、閾値より広い距離が遠い「遠い」と判断した、とする。つまり、番組補助情報取得部２５は、空間的関係情報「disjoint-f（狭域）」を取得する。 Next, the key information acquisition unit 21 acquires key information “Kagoshima”. Next, the scene determination unit 22 determines that no scene change has occurred. Then, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires the inclusion relationship “disjoint” between “Fukuoka” and “Kagoshima”. Further, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 uses the map information in the map information storage unit 10 to indicate that “Fukuoka” and “Kagoshima” are “narrow areas” that are narrower than the threshold, and “far” that is far from the threshold. Assume that you have made a decision. That is, the program supplementary information acquisition unit 25 acquires spatial relationship information “disjoint-f (narrow region)”.
　次に、番組補助情報取得部２５は、「disjoint-f（狭域）」に対応する説明パターン「経路説明」に従って、「福岡」「鹿児島」を含む地図を取得する。また、番組補助情報取得部２５は、「福岡」から「鹿児島」への経路探索を行い、経路情報を取得する。また、番組補助情報取得部２５は、当該経路情報に対応する各地点のストリートビューを順次取得する。そして、番組補助情報出力部２６は、「福岡」「鹿児島」を含む地図を出力し、かつ当該地図上に、「福岡」から「鹿児島」への経路探索を出力する（図１３（ｉ）の１３１７参照）。また、番組補助情報出力部２６は、「福岡」から「鹿児島」への経路を示すように、経路情報に対応する各地点のストリートビューを順次出力する（図１３（ｉ）の１３１８参照）。 Next, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires a map including “Fukuoka” and “Kagoshima” according to the explanation pattern “route explanation” corresponding to “disjoint-f (narrow area)”. The program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 searches for a route from “Fukuoka” to “Kagoshima” and acquires route information. Moreover, the program supplementary information acquisition part 25 acquires sequentially the street view of each point corresponding to the said route information. Then, the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs a map including “Fukuoka” and “Kagoshima”, and outputs a route search from “Fukuoka” to “Kagoshima” on the map (FIG. 13 (i)). 1317). Further, the program auxiliary information output unit 26 sequentially outputs the street view of each point corresponding to the route information so as to indicate the route from “Fukuoka” to “Kagoshima” (see 1318 in FIG. 13I).
　最後に、キー情報取得部２１は、キー情報「嘉例川駅」を取得する。次に、シーン判断部２２は、シーンの切り替わりが発生している、と判断する。一つ前の「鹿児島」という地名が出現してから１５秒以上経っているからである。そして、番組補助情報取得部２５等は、「嘉例川駅」単体での演出を行う。つまり、番組補助情報取得部２５は、「嘉例川駅」を含む地図を取得し、番組補助情報出力部２６は当該地図を出力する（図１３（ｊ）の１３１９参照）。また、番組補助情報取得部２５は、「嘉例川駅」をキーとして写真を取得し、番組補助情報出力部２６は当該写真を出力する（図１３（ｊ）の１３２０参照）。 Finally, the key information acquisition unit 21 acquires key information “Kaegyogawa Station”. Next, the scene determination unit 22 determines that a scene change has occurred. This is because it has been over 15 seconds since the previous place name “Kagoshima” appeared. Then, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 or the like performs an effect for “Kaegyogawa Station” alone. That is, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires a map including “Kaegyogawa Station”, and the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs the map (see 1319 in FIG. 13J). Further, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires a photograph using “Kaegyogawa Station” as a key, and the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs the photograph (see 1320 in FIG. 13J).
　以上、本実施の形態によれば、出力中の番組を補助する番組補助情報を適切に出力できる。さらに具体的には、本実施の形態によれば、出力中の番組で出てくる地点情報の理解を増進するために、ストリートビュー、地図情報、写真等を適切に出力できる。 As described above, according to this embodiment, it is possible to appropriately output program auxiliary information for assisting a program being output. More specifically, according to the present embodiment, street view, map information, a photograph, and the like can be appropriately output in order to improve understanding of point information that appears in the program being output.
　なお、本実施の形態によれば、出力中の番組のジャンルに応じて、番組補助情報の出力態様を変更しても良い。例えば、番組のジャンルが「ニュース」場合は、他のジャンルの場合と比較して、番組の出力領域を狭くして、番組補助情報の出力領域を広くすることは好適である。また、例えば、番組のジャンルが「ニュース」場合、ストリートビューは表示せず、地図情報または／および写真を表示し、他のジャンルの場合はストリートビューも表示し得る、としても良い。なお、番組補助情報の出力態様の変更とは、レイアウトの変更、出力する番組補助情報の種類の変更等である。 Note that, according to the present embodiment, the output mode of the program auxiliary information may be changed according to the genre of the program being output. For example, when the genre of the program is “news”, it is preferable to narrow the output area of the program and widen the output area of the program auxiliary information as compared with the case of other genres. Further, for example, when the genre of the program is “news”, the street view may not be displayed, the map information or / and the photograph may be displayed, and the street view may be displayed when the genre is other genres. The change in the output mode of the program auxiliary information includes a change in layout, a change in the type of program auxiliary information to be output, and the like.
　また、本実施の形態によれば、出力中の番組を補助する２種類以上の番組補助情報を適切に出力できる。 Further, according to the present embodiment, two or more types of program auxiliary information for assisting the program being output can be appropriately output.
　また、本実施の形態によれば、出力中の番組を補助する地点関連情報を適切に出力できる。 Further, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately output the spot related information that assists the program being output.
　また、本実施の形態において、２種類以上の番組補助情報に出力の優先順位があり、番組補助情報出力部２６は、一の種類の番組補助情報を出力できない場合に、他の種類の番組補助情報を出力することは好適である。例えば、番組補助情報取得部２５が、取得された地点情報に対するストリートビューを取得できない場合に、当該地点情報に対する写真を取得し、番組補助情報出力部２６が当該写真を出力することは好適である。なお、かかる場合、ストリートビューが写真より優先順位が高いこととなる。 In the present embodiment, when two or more types of program auxiliary information have an output priority, and the program auxiliary information output unit 26 cannot output one type of program auxiliary information, other types of program auxiliary information are output. It is preferable to output information. For example, when the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 cannot acquire the street view for the acquired point information, it is preferable that the program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs the photo for the point information. . In such a case, street view has a higher priority than photographs.
　なお、本実施の形態において、移動手段情報を用いて、出力する番組補助情報の種類を変更したり、番組補助情報の出力態様（例えば、レイアウト、出力時間等）を変更しても良い。例えば、移動手段情報「電車」が取得された場合、番組補助情報取得部２５は出発駅から終点駅までの路線の経路を取得し、番組補助情報出力部２６は当該経路の情報を取得しても良い。 In the present embodiment, the type of program auxiliary information to be output may be changed using the moving means information, or the output mode (for example, layout, output time, etc.) of the program auxiliary information may be changed. For example, when the moving means information “train” is acquired, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25 acquires the route of the route from the departure station to the end station, and the program auxiliary information output unit 26 acquires the information of the route. Also good.
　また、本実施の形態における情報処理装置２を実現するソフトウェアは、以下のようなプログラムである。つまり、このプログラムは、コンピュータを、出力中の番組に関連する情報であり、１または２以上のキー情報を含む番組関連情報を受信する番組関連情報受信部と、前記番組関連情報受信部が受信した番組関連情報から、予め決められたカテゴリーに属する用語である１または２以上のキー情報を取得するキー情報取得部と、前記キー情報取得部が取得したキー情報に対応する情報であり、前記番組の内容を補足する情報である番組補助情報を取得する番組補助情報取得部と、前記番組補助情報取得部が取得した番組補助情報を出力する番組補助情報出力部として機能させるためのプログラムである。 Further, the software that realizes the information processing apparatus 2 in the present embodiment is the following program. That is, this program is information related to the program being output from the computer, and the program-related information receiving unit that receives program-related information including one or more key information and the program-related information receiving unit receive the program. A key information acquisition unit that acquires one or more key information that is a term belonging to a predetermined category from the program-related information, and information corresponding to the key information acquired by the key information acquisition unit, This is a program for functioning as a program auxiliary information acquisition unit that acquires program auxiliary information that is information that supplements the content of a program, and a program auxiliary information output unit that outputs program auxiliary information acquired by the program auxiliary information acquisition unit. .
　また、上記プログラムにおいて、前記番組補助情報取得部は、２種類以上の番組補助情報を取得でき、前記番組補助情報出力部は、前記２種類以上の番組補助情報のうち、１または２種類以上の番組補助情報を出力するものとして、コンピュータを機能させるプログラムであることは好適である。 In the above program, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit can acquire two or more types of program auxiliary information, and the program auxiliary information output unit includes one or more types of the two or more types of program auxiliary information. A program that causes a computer to function as the program auxiliary information is suitable.
　また、上記プログラムにおいて、前記番組補助情報取得部は、２以上のキー情報の関係に応じて、異なる種類の番組補助情報を取得する ものとして、コンピュータを機能させるプログラムであることは好適である。 In the above program, it is preferable that the program auxiliary information acquisition unit is a program that causes a computer to function as a device for acquiring different types of program auxiliary information according to the relationship between two or more key information.
　また、上記プログラムにおいて、前記２種類以上の番組補助情報に出力の優先順位があり、前記番組補助情報出力部は、一の種類の番組補助情報を出力できない場合に、他の種類の番組補助情報を出力するものとして、コンピュータを機能させるプログラムであることは好適である。 Further, in the above program, when the two or more types of program auxiliary information have a priority of output, and the program auxiliary information output unit cannot output one type of program auxiliary information, other types of program auxiliary information Is preferably a program that causes a computer to function.
　また、上記プログラムにおいて、前記キー情報は、地点のカテゴリーに属する用語である地点情報であり、前記番組補助情報は、地点に関する情報である地点関連情報を含むものとして、コンピュータを機能させるプログラムであることは好適である。 In the above program, the key information is point information that is a term belonging to the category of the point, and the program auxiliary information is a program that causes the computer to function as including point-related information that is information about the point. That is preferred.
　また、上記プログラムにおいて、前記番組補助情報取得部は、前記キー情報取得部が取得した２以上の各地点情報の空間的な関係を示す空間的関係情報を取得し、当該空間的関係情報を用いて、２以上の番組補助情報を連続して取得するものとして、コンピュータを機能させるプログラムであることは好適である。 In the program, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit acquires spatial relationship information indicating a spatial relationship between two or more pieces of point information acquired by the key information acquisition unit, and uses the spatial relationship information. Thus, it is preferable that the program is a program that causes a computer to function as continuously acquiring two or more pieces of program auxiliary information.
　また、上記プログラムにおいて、コンピュータを、前記番組におけるシーンの切り替わりを判断するシーン判断部としてさらに機能させ、前記番組補助情報出力部は、前記シーン判断部が判断したシーンの切り替わりの際には、番組補助情報の連続した出力を行わないものとして、コンピュータを機能させるプログラムであることは好適である。 Further, in the above program, the computer is further caused to function as a scene determination unit for determining a scene change in the program, and the program auxiliary information output unit is configured to display a program at the time of the scene change determined by the scene determination unit. It is preferable that the program functions as a computer that does not continuously output auxiliary information.
　また、上記プログラムにおいて、前記地点関連情報は、地点の写真、地点のストリートビュー、および地点の地図情報のうちの１種類以上の情報を含むものとして、コンピュータを機能させるプログラムであることは好適である。 In the above program, the point-related information is preferably a program that causes a computer to function as including one or more types of information among a point photo, a point street view, and a point map information. is there.
　また、上記プログラムにおいて、前記地点関連情報は、地点のストリートビューを含み、前記２種類以上の番組補助情報に出力の優先順位があり、前記番組補助情報出力部は、前記キー情報取得部が取得したキー情報に対応するストリートビューが出力できない場合に、前記キー情報取得部が取得したキー情報に対応する他の種類の番組補助情報を出力するものとして、コンピュータを機能させるプログラムであることは好適である。 In the above program, the location-related information includes a street view of the location, the two or more types of program auxiliary information have an output priority, and the program auxiliary information output unit is acquired by the key information acquisition unit. When the street view corresponding to the key information cannot be output, it is preferable that the program allows the computer to function as another type of program auxiliary information corresponding to the key information acquired by the key information acquisition unit. It is.
　また、上記プログラムにおいて、コンピュータを、前記番組の種類を取得する番組種類取得部としてさらに機能させ、前記番組補助情報出力部は、前記種類に応じて、出力する番組補助情報の種類を変える、または番組補助情報の出力態様を変えるものとして、コンピュータを機能させるプログラムであることは好適である。 In the above program, the computer may further function as a program type acquisition unit that acquires the type of the program, and the program auxiliary information output unit changes a type of program auxiliary information to be output according to the type, or As a program for changing the output mode of the program auxiliary information, a program that causes a computer to function is preferable.
　また、上記プログラムにおいて、前記キー情報取得部は、前記番組関連情報受信部が受信した番組関連情報から、コンピュータを、２以上のキー情報を取得し、前記２以上のキー情報を用いて、前記番組内で使用している移動手段の種類を示す移動手段情報を取得する移動手段情報取得部としてさらに機能させ、前記番組補助情報出力部は、前記移動手段情報に応じて、番組補助情報の出力態様を変えるものとして、コンピュータを機能させるプログラムであることは好適である。 In the program, the key information acquisition unit acquires two or more key information from the program related information received by the program related information reception unit, and uses the two or more key information, Further functioning as a moving means information acquisition unit for acquiring moving means information indicating the type of moving means used in the program, the program auxiliary information output unit outputs program auxiliary information according to the moving means information. It is preferable that the program is a program that causes a computer to function as a mode change.
　また、上記プログラムにおいて、コンピュータを、番組を受信する番組受信部と、前記番組受信部が受信した番組を出力する番組出力部としてさらに機能させ、前記番組補助情報出力部は、前記番組補助情報を前記番組と共に出力するものとして、コンピュータを機能させるプログラムであることは好適である。 In the above program, the computer is further caused to function as a program receiving unit that receives a program and a program output unit that outputs a program received by the program receiving unit, and the program auxiliary information output unit outputs the program auxiliary information It is preferable that the program to be output together with the program is a program that causes a computer to function.
　（実施の形態３）
　本実施の形態において、番組関連情報から１以上のキー情報を取得し、当該１以上のキー情報を用いて、番組補助情報を出力する情報処理装置について説明する。なお、ここでのキー情報は、地点情報以外であり、例えば、出演者である。つまり、実施の形態２との相違点は、地点情報以外のキー情報を用いて、番組補助情報を取得する点である。 (Embodiment 3)
In the present embodiment, an information processing apparatus that acquires one or more key information from program-related information and outputs program auxiliary information using the one or more key information will be described. The key information here is other than the point information, for example, a performer. That is, the difference from the second embodiment is that program auxiliary information is acquired using key information other than the point information.
　図１４は、本実施の形態における情報処理装置３のブロック図である。情報処理装置３は、受付部１２、番組受信部１３、番組関連情報受信部１４、番組出力部１５、キー情報取得部３１、番組補助情報取得部３２、番組補助情報出力部２６を備える。 FIG. 14 is a block diagram of the information processing apparatus 3 in the present embodiment. The information processing apparatus 3 includes a receiving unit 12, a program receiving unit 13, a program related information receiving unit 14, a program output unit 15, a key information acquisition unit 31, a program auxiliary information acquisition unit 32, and a program auxiliary information output unit 26.
　キー情報取得部３１は、番組関連情報受信部１４が受信した番組関連情報から、予め決められたカテゴリーに属する用語である１または２以上のキー情報を取得する。ここで、カテゴリーは、例えば、人名（通常、出演者の名前や、番組で取り上げている人の名前等）である。 The key information acquisition unit 31 acquires one or more key information, which are terms belonging to a predetermined category, from the program related information received by the program related information receiving unit 14. Here, the category is, for example, the name of a person (usually the name of a performer, the name of a person taken up in a program, etc.).
　番組補助情報取得部３２は、キー情報取得部３１が取得したキー情報に対応する情報であり、番組の内容を補足する情報である番組補助情報を取得する。ここで、番組補助情報とは、人に関する情報である人関連情報である。また、番組補助情報は、例えば、その人に関する写真、その人のブログである。なお、番組補助情報取得部３２は、２種類以上の番組補助情報を取得しても良い。 The program auxiliary information acquisition unit 32 is information corresponding to the key information acquired by the key information acquisition unit 31, and acquires program auxiliary information that is information supplementing the content of the program. Here, the program auxiliary information is person-related information that is information about a person. Further, the program auxiliary information is, for example, a photograph about the person and the person's blog. The program auxiliary information acquisition unit 32 may acquire two or more types of program auxiliary information.
　番組補助情報取得部３２は、キー情報取得部３１が取得した２以上の人関連情報を用いて、写真を取得しても良い。例えば、番組補助情報取得部３２は、キー情報取得部３１が取得した２以上の人名を用いて、当該人が全員写っている写真を取得しても良い。番組補助情報取得部３２は、図示しない記録媒体に格納されている写真の集合から、写真を検索しても良い。かかる場合、写真には、写っている人の属性が付加されている。また、番組補助情報取得部３２は、Ｗｅｂ上の写真を、キー情報取得部３１が取得した１または２以上のキー情報をキーとして、検索しても良い。 The program auxiliary information acquisition unit 32 may acquire a photograph using two or more person-related information acquired by the key information acquisition unit 31. For example, the program supplementary information acquisition unit 32 may acquire a photograph in which all the persons are shown using two or more person names acquired by the key information acquisition unit 31. The program auxiliary information acquisition unit 32 may search for photos from a set of photos stored in a recording medium (not shown). In such a case, the attribute of the person being photographed is added to the photograph. In addition, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 32 may search for photos on the Web using one or more key information acquired by the key information acquisition unit 31 as a key.
　キー情報取得部３１、番組補助情報取得部３２は、通常、ＭＰＵやメモリ等から実現され得る。キー情報取得部３１の処理手順は、通常、ソフトウェアで実現され、当該ソフトウェアはＲＯＭ等の記録媒体に記録されている。但し、ハードウェア（専用回路）で実現しても良い。 The key information acquisition unit 31 and the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 32 can be usually realized by an MPU, a memory, or the like. The processing procedure of the key information acquisition unit 31 is usually realized by software, and the software is recorded on a recording medium such as a ROM. However, it may be realized by hardware (dedicated circuit).
　次に、情報処理装置３の動作について、図１５のフローチャートを用いて説明する。図１５のフローチャートにおいて、図７のフローチャートと同一のステップについて、説明を省略する。 Next, the operation of the information processing apparatus 3 will be described using the flowchart of FIG. In the flowchart of FIG. 15, the description of the same steps as those in the flowchart of FIG. 7 is omitted.
　（ステップＳ１５０１）キー情報取得部３１は、番組関連情報から１または２以上の人関連情報を取得する。なお、ここで、人関連情報を取得できない場合もあり得る。人関連情報を取得できない場合は、ステップＳ２０１に戻る。 (Step S1501) The key information acquisition unit 31 acquires one or more person-related information from the program-related information. Here, there may be a case where the person-related information cannot be acquired. If the person related information cannot be acquired, the process returns to step S201.
　（ステップＳ１５０２）番組補助情報取得部３２は、ステップＳ１５０１で取得された１または２以上の人関連情報を用いて、番組補助情報を取得する。 (Step S1502) The program auxiliary information acquisition unit 32 acquires the program auxiliary information using one or more person-related information acquired in step S1501.
　（ステップＳ１５０３）番組補助情報出力部２６は、ステップＳ１５０２で取得された番組補助情報を出力する。ステップＳ２０１に戻る。 (Step S1503) The program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs the program auxiliary information acquired in step S1502. The process returns to step S201.
　（ステップＳ１５０４）番組補助情報取得部３２は、指示されたキー情報に対応する番組補助情報を取得する。 (Step S1504) The program auxiliary information acquisition unit 32 acquires program auxiliary information corresponding to the instructed key information.
　（ステップＳ１５０５）番組補助情報出力部２６は、ステップＳ１５０４で取得された番組補助情報を出力する。ステップＳ２０１に戻る (Step S1505) The program auxiliary information output unit 26 outputs the program auxiliary information acquired in step S1504. Return to step S201
　なお、図１５のステップＳ１５０２において、番組補助情報取得部３２は、２以上の人関連情報を用いて、番組補助情報を取得することは好適である。例えば、番組補助情報取得部３２は、２以上の人名を用いて、２以上の人が写っている写真を取得することは好適である。 In addition, in step S1502 of FIG. 15, it is suitable for the program supplementary information acquisition part 32 to acquire program supplementary information using two or more person relevant information. For example, it is preferable that the program supplementary information acquisition unit 32 acquires a photograph showing two or more people using two or more names.
　また、図１５のフローチャートにおいて、シーンの切り替わりが判断され、番組補助情報取得部３２は、一のシーン内の２以上の人関連情報を用いて、番組補助情報を取得することは好適である。なお、かかる場合、情報処理装置３はシーン判断部２２を具備する。 Also, in the flowchart of FIG. 15, it is determined that the scene is switched, and it is preferable that the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 32 acquires the program auxiliary information using two or more person-related information in one scene. In such a case, the information processing apparatus 3 includes a scene determination unit 22.
　また、図１５のフローチャートにおいて、電源オフや処理終了の割り込みにより処理は終了する。 Further, in the flowchart of FIG. 15, the process is ended by powering off or interruption for aborting the process.
　以上、本実施の形態によれば、出力中の番組を補助する番組補助情報を適切に出力できる。具体的には、本実施の形態によれば、出力中の番組の出演者の写真やブログを適切に出力できる。 As described above, according to this embodiment, it is possible to appropriately output program auxiliary information for assisting a program being output. Specifically, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately output photos and blogs of performers of the program being output.
　なお、本実施の形態において、番組補助情報取得部３２は、出力中の番組の出演者識別子を電子番組表から取得し、当該出演者識別子をキーとして、出演者の写真やブログを取得しても良い。かかる場合、情報処理装置３は、情報処理装置２と同様、電子番組表格納部２０を有する。 In the present embodiment, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit 32 acquires the performer identifier of the program being output from the electronic program guide, and acquires the performer's photo and blog using the performer identifier as a key. Also good. In such a case, the information processing apparatus 3 includes the electronic program guide storage unit 20 as with the information processing apparatus 2.
　なお、本実施の形態における情報処理装置３を実現するソフトウェアは、以下のようなプログラムである。つまり、このプログラムは、コンピュータを、出力中の番組に関連する情報であり、１または２以上のキー情報を含む番組関連情報を受信する番組関連情報受信部と、前記番組関連情報受信部が受信した番組関連情報から、予め決められたカテゴリーに属する用語である１または２以上のキー情報を取得するキー情報取得部と、前記キー情報取得部が取得したキー情報に対応する情報であり、前記番組の内容を補足する情報である番組補助情報を取得する番組補助情報取得部と、前記番組補助情報取得部が取得した番組補助情報を出力する番組補助情報出力部として機能させるためのプログラムである。 Note that the software that implements the information processing apparatus 3 in the present embodiment is the following program. That is, this program is information related to the program being output from the computer, and the program-related information receiving unit that receives program-related information including one or more key information and the program-related information receiving unit receive the program. A key information acquisition unit that acquires one or more key information that is a term belonging to a predetermined category from the program-related information, and information corresponding to the key information acquired by the key information acquisition unit, This is a program for functioning as a program auxiliary information acquisition unit that acquires program auxiliary information that is information that supplements the content of a program, and a program auxiliary information output unit that outputs program auxiliary information acquired by the program auxiliary information acquisition unit. .
　また、上記プログラムにおいて、前記番組補助情報取得部は、２種類以上の番組補助情報を取得でき、前記番組補助情報出力部は、前記２種類以上の番組補助情報のうち、１または２種類以上の番組補助情報を出力するものとして、コンピュータを機能させるプログラムであることは好適である。 In the above program, the program auxiliary information acquisition unit can acquire two or more types of program auxiliary information, and the program auxiliary information output unit includes one or more types of the two or more types of program auxiliary information. A program that causes a computer to function as the program auxiliary information is suitable.
　また、上記プログラムにおいて、前記番組補助情報取得部は、２以上のキー情報の関係に応じて、異なる種類の番組補助情報を取得する ものとして、コンピュータを機能させるプログラムであることは好適である。 In the above program, it is preferable that the program auxiliary information acquisition unit is a program that causes a computer to function as a device for acquiring different types of program auxiliary information according to the relationship between two or more key information.
　また、上記プログラムにおいて、前記２種類以上の番組補助情報に出力の優先順位があり、前記番組補助情報出力部は、一の種類の番組補助情報を出力できない場合に、他の種類の番組補助情報を出力するものとして、コンピュータを機能させるプログラムであることは好適である。 Further, in the above program, when the two or more types of program auxiliary information have a priority of output, and the program auxiliary information output unit cannot output one type of program auxiliary information, other types of program auxiliary information Is preferably a program that causes a computer to function.
　また、上記プログラムにおいて、前記キー情報は、人名のカテゴリーに属する用語である人名情報であり、前記番組補助情報は、人に関する情報である人関連情報を含むものとして、コンピュータを機能させるプログラムであることは好適である。 In the above program, the key information is personal name information that is a term belonging to a personal name category, and the program auxiliary information is a program that causes a computer to function as including person-related information that is information about a person. That is preferred.
　また、上記プログラムにおいて、コンピュータを、番組を受信する番組受信部と、前記番組受信部が受信した番組を出力する番組出力部としてさらに機能させ、前記番組補助情報出力部は、前記番組補助情報を前記番組と共に出力するものとして、コンピュータを機能させるプログラムであることは好適である。 In the above program, the computer is further caused to function as a program receiving unit that receives a program and a program output unit that outputs a program received by the program receiving unit, and the program auxiliary information output unit outputs the program auxiliary information It is preferable that the program to be output together with the program is a program that causes a computer to function.
　（実施の形態４）
　本実施の形態において、上記実施の形態とは、番組出力装置で出力中の番組を補助する番組補助情報を、番組出力装置とは異なる装置に出力できる点である。 (Embodiment 4)
In the present embodiment, the above-described embodiment is that program auxiliary information for assisting a program being output by the program output device can be output to a device different from the program output device.
　また、本実施の形態において、番組出力装置のリモコンに、番組出力装置で出力中の番組を補助する番組補助情報を出力できる情報処理システムについて説明する。 In the present embodiment, an information processing system capable of outputting program auxiliary information for assisting a program being output by the program output device to the remote controller of the program output device will be described.
　図１６は、本実施の形態における情報処理システム３の概念図である。情報処理システム３は、番組出力装置３１、情報処理装置３２を備える。番組出力装置３１は、いわゆるテレビジョン受信機である。また、情報処理装置３２は、情報処理装置３２は、番組補助情報を出力するが、番組は出力しない。また、情報処理装置３２は、ここでは、テレビジョン受信機のリモコンの機能を備えるが、リモコンの機能を備えなくても良い。 FIG. 16 is a conceptual diagram of the information processing system 3 in the present embodiment. The information processing system 3 includes a program output device 31 and an information processing device 32. The program output device 31 is a so-called television receiver. Further, the information processing device 32 outputs the program auxiliary information, but does not output the program. In addition, the information processing device 32 has a function of a remote control of the television receiver here, but may not have a function of the remote control.
　図１７は、本実施の形態における情報処理システム３のブロック図である。情報処理システム３を構成する番組出力装置３１は、制御信号受信部３１１、制御部３１２、番組受信部１３、番組出力部１５を備える。 FIG. 17 is a block diagram of the information processing system 3 in the present embodiment. The program output device 31 constituting the information processing system 3 includes a control signal receiving unit 311, a control unit 312, a program receiving unit 13, and a program output unit 15.
　情報処理装置３２は、地図情報格納部１０、電子番組表格納部２０、指示受付部３２１、制御信号送信部３２２、チャネル番号取得部３２３、番組関連情報受信部１４、キー情報取得部３１、シーン判断部２２、番組種類取得部２３、移動手段情報取得部２４、番組補助情報取得部２５、番組補助情報出力部２６を備える。 The information processing device 32 includes a map information storage unit 10, an electronic program guide storage unit 20, an instruction reception unit 321, a control signal transmission unit 322, a channel number acquisition unit 323, a program related information reception unit 14, a key information acquisition unit 31, a scene A determination unit 22, a program type acquisition unit 23, a moving means information acquisition unit 24, a program auxiliary information acquisition unit 25, and a program auxiliary information output unit 26 are provided.
　番組出力装置３１を構成する制御信号受信部３１１は、制御信号を受信する。制御信号受信部３１１は、通常、情報処理装置３２から制御信号を受信する。制御信号とは、番組出力装置３１を制御するための信号であり、チャネル変更、音量アップ、音量ダウン、電源オン、電源オフ等を指示する信号である。 The control signal receiving unit 311 constituting the program output device 31 receives the control signal. The control signal receiving unit 311 normally receives a control signal from the information processing device 32. The control signal is a signal for controlling the program output device 31 and is a signal for instructing channel change, volume up, volume down, power on, power off, and the like.
　制御信号受信部３１１は、通常、赤外線等を用いた無線通信手段で実現される。 The control signal receiving unit 311 is usually realized by wireless communication means using infrared rays or the like.
　制御部３１２は、制御信号受信部３１１が受信した制御信号等に従って、番組出力装置３１を制御する。 The control unit 312 controls the program output device 31 in accordance with the control signal received by the control signal receiving unit 311.
　制御部３１２は、通常、ＭＰＵやメモリ等から実現され得る。制御部３１２の処理手順は、通常、ソフトウェアで実現され、当該ソフトウェアはＲＯＭ等の記録媒体に記録されている。但し、ハードウェア（専用回路）で実現しても良い。 The control unit 312 can usually be realized by an MPU, a memory, or the like. The processing procedure of the control unit 312 is usually realized by software, and the software is recorded in a recording medium such as a ROM. However, it may be realized by hardware (dedicated circuit).
　情報処理装置３２を構成する指示受付部３２１は、番組出力装置３１を制御するための指示をユーザから受け付ける。指示とは、例えば、チャネルの変更指示、音量アップの指示、音量ダウンの指示、電源オンの指示、電源オフの指示等である。 The instruction receiving unit 321 configuring the information processing apparatus 32 receives an instruction for controlling the program output apparatus 31 from the user. The instructions include, for example, a channel change instruction, a volume up instruction, a volume down instruction, a power on instruction, a power off instruction, and the like.
　制御信号送信部３２２は、指示受付部３２１が受け付けた指示に応じて、番組出力装置３１に制御信号を送信する。 The control signal transmission unit 322 transmits a control signal to the program output device 31 in accordance with the instruction received by the instruction reception unit 321.
　制御信号送信部３２２は、通常、赤外線等を用いた無線通信手段で実現される。 The control signal transmission unit 322 is usually realized by a wireless communication means using infrared rays or the like.
　チャネル番号取得部３２３は、出力中の番組のチャネル番号を取得する。チャネル番号取得部３２３は、通常、指示受付部３２１が受け付けたチャネルの変更指示に対応するチャネル番号を取得する。 The channel number acquisition unit 323 acquires the channel number of the program being output. The channel number acquisition unit 323 normally acquires a channel number corresponding to the channel change instruction received by the instruction reception unit 321.
　チャネル番号取得部３２３は、通常、ＭＰＵやメモリ等から実現され得る。チャネル番号取得部３２３の処理手順は、通常、ソフトウェアで実現され、当該ソフトウェアはＲＯＭ等の記録媒体に記録されている。但し、ハードウェア（専用回路）で実現しても良い。 The channel number acquisition unit 323 can be usually realized by an MPU, a memory, or the like. The processing procedure of the channel number acquisition unit 323 is usually realized by software, and the software is recorded on a recording medium such as a ROM. However, it may be realized by hardware (dedicated circuit).
　次に、情報処理システム３を構成する情報処理装置３２の動作について、図１８のフローチャートを用いて説明する。なお、図１８のフローチャートにおいて、図１８のフローチャートと同一のステップについて、説明を省略する。また、番組出力装置３１の動作は、通常のテレビジョン受信機の動作と同様であるので、説明を省略する。 Next, the operation of the information processing apparatus 32 constituting the information processing system 3 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the flowchart of FIG. 18, the description of the same steps as those in the flowchart of FIG. 18 is omitted. Further, the operation of the program output device 31 is the same as the operation of a normal television receiver, and thus the description thereof is omitted.
　（ステップＳ１８０１）指示受付部３２１が受け付けた指示は、番組出力装置３１の制御指示であるか否かを判断する。制御指示であればステップＳ１８０２に行き、制御指示でなければステップＳ７０５に行く。 (Step S1801) It is determined whether or not the instruction received by the instruction receiving unit 321 is a control instruction for the program output device 31. If it is a control instruction, the process goes to step S1802, and if it is not a control instruction, the process goes to step S705.
　（ステップＳ１８０２）制御信号送信部３２２は、制御指示に対応する制御信号を番組出力装置３１に送信する。ステップＳ２０３に戻る。 (Step S1802) The control signal transmission unit 322 transmits a control signal corresponding to the control instruction to the program output device 31. The process returns to step S203.
　なお、図１８のフローチャートにおいて、電源オフや処理終了の割り込みにより処理は終了する。 Note that in the flowchart of FIG. 18, the processing is ended by powering off or interruption for aborting the processing.
　以上、本実施の形態によれば、番組出力装置３１で出力中の番組を補助する番組補助情報を、番組出力装置３１とは異なる装置である情報処理装置３２に適切に出力できる。 As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately output the program auxiliary information for assisting the program being output by the program output device 31 to the information processing device 32 which is a device different from the program output device 31.
　また、本実施の形態によれば、番組出力装置３１のリモコンに、番組出力装置３１で出力中の番組を補助する番組補助情報を適切に出力できる Further, according to the present embodiment, program auxiliary information for assisting a program being output by the program output device 31 can be appropriately output to the remote controller of the program output device 31.
　なお、本実施の形態における情報処理装置３２を実現するソフトウェアは、以下のようなプログラムである。つまり、このプログラムは、コンピュータを、出力中の番組に関連する情報であり、１または２以上のキー情報を含む番組関連情報を受信する番組関連情報受信部と、前記番組関連情報受信部が受信した番組関連情報から、予め決められたカテゴリーに属する用語である１または２以上のキー情報を取得するキー情報取得部と、前記キー情報取得部が取得したキー情報に対応する情報であり、前記番組の内容を補足する情報である番組補助情報を取得する番組補助情報取得部と、前記番組補助情報取得部が取得した番組補助情報を出力する番組補助情報出力部として機能させるためのプログラムである。 Note that the software that implements the information processing apparatus 32 in the present embodiment is the following program. That is, this program is information related to the program being output from the computer, and the program-related information receiving unit that receives program-related information including one or more key information and the program-related information receiving unit receive the program. A key information acquisition unit that acquires one or more key information that is a term belonging to a predetermined category from the program-related information, and information corresponding to the key information acquired by the key information acquisition unit, This is a program for functioning as a program auxiliary information acquisition unit that acquires program auxiliary information that is information that supplements the content of a program, and a program auxiliary information output unit that outputs program auxiliary information acquired by the program auxiliary information acquisition unit. .
　また、上記プログラムにおいて、コンピュータを、前記番組のチャネル番号を取得するチャネル番号取得部としてさらに機能させ、前記キー情報取得部は、前記チャネル番号に対応する番組関連情報から、予め決められたカテゴリーに属する用語である１または２以上のキー情報を取得するものとして、コンピュータを機能させるプログラムであることは好適である。 Further, in the above program, the computer is further caused to function as a channel number acquisition unit that acquires a channel number of the program, and the key information acquisition unit is assigned to a predetermined category from the program related information corresponding to the channel number. It is preferable that the program is a program that causes a computer to function as one that acquires one or more key information that is a term to which the computer belongs.
　また、上記プログラムにおいて、コンピュータを、前記番組出力装置を制御するための指示を受け付ける指示受付部と、前記指示受付部が受け付けた指示に応じて、前記番組出力装置に制御信号を送信する制御信号送信部としてさらに機能させ、前記指示は、チャネルの変更指示を含み、前記チャネル番号取得部は、前記指示受付部が受け付けたチャネルの変更指示に対応するチャネル番号を取得するものとして、コンピュータを機能させるプログラムであることは好適である。 In the program, the computer receives an instruction receiving unit that receives an instruction to control the program output device, and a control signal that transmits a control signal to the program output device according to the instruction received by the instruction receiving unit. Further function as a transmission unit, the instruction includes a channel change instruction, and the channel number acquisition unit functions as a computer that acquires a channel number corresponding to the channel change instruction received by the instruction reception unit. It is preferable that the program is to be executed.
　また、図１９は、本明細書で述べたプログラムを実行して、上述した種々の実施の形態の番組受信装置、情報処理装置等を実現するコンピュータの外観を示す。上述の実施の形態は、コンピュータハードウェア及びその上で実行されるコンピュータプログラムで実現され得る。図１９は、このコンピュータシステム３００の概観図であり、図２０は、システム３００のブロック図である。 FIG. 19 shows the external appearance of a computer that executes the program described in this specification to realize the program receiving device, the information processing device, and the like according to the various embodiments described above. The above-described embodiments can be realized by computer hardware and a computer program executed thereon. FIG. 19 is an overview diagram of the computer system 300, and FIG. 20 is a block diagram of the system 300.
　図１９において、コンピュータシステム３００は、ＣＤ－ＲＯＭドライブを含むコンピュータ３０１と、キーボード３０２と、マウス３０３と、モニタ３０４とを含む。 19, the computer system 300 includes a computer 301 including a CD-ROM drive, a keyboard 302, a mouse 303, and a monitor 304.
　図２０において、コンピュータ３０１は、ＣＤ－ＲＯＭドライブ３０１２に加えて、ＭＰＵ３０１３と、ＭＰＵ３０１３、ＣＤ－ＲＯＭドライブ３０１２に接続されたバス３０１４と、ブートアッププログラム等のプログラムを記憶するためのＲＯＭ３０１５と、ＭＰＵ３０１３に接続され、アプリケーションプログラムの命令を一時的に記憶するとともに一時記憶空間を提供するためのＲＡＭ３０１６と、アプリケーションプログラム、システムプログラム、及びデータを記憶するためのハードディスク３０１７とを含む。ここでは、図示しないが、コンピュータ３０１は、さらに、ＬＡＮへの接続を提供するネットワークカードを含んでも良い。 20, in addition to the CD-ROM drive 3012, the computer 301 includes an MPU 3013, a bus 3014 connected to the MPU 3013 and the CD-ROM drive 3012, a ROM 3015 for storing programs such as a boot-up program, and an MPU 3013. And a RAM 3016 for temporarily storing instructions of the application program and providing a temporary storage space, and a hard disk 3017 for storing the application program, the system program, and data. Although not shown here, the computer 301 may further include a network card that provides connection to a LAN.
　コンピュータシステム３００に、上述した実施の形態の情報処理装置等の機能を実行させるプログラムは、ＣＤ－ＲＯＭ３１０１に記憶されて、ＣＤ－ＲＯＭドライブ３０１２に挿入され、さらにハードディスク３０１７に転送されても良い。これに代えて、プログラムは、図示しないネットワークを介してコンピュータ３０１に送信され、ハードディスク３０１７に記憶されても良い。プログラムは実行の際にＲＡＭ３０１６にロードされる。プログラムは、ＣＤ－ＲＯＭ３１０１またはネットワークから直接、ロードされても良い。 A program that causes the computer system 300 to execute the functions of the information processing apparatus and the like of the above-described embodiment may be stored in the CD-ROM 3101, inserted into the CD-ROM drive 3012, and further transferred to the hard disk 3017. Alternatively, the program may be transmitted to the computer 301 via a network (not shown) and stored in the hard disk 3017. The program is loaded into the RAM 3016 at the time of execution. The program may be loaded directly from the CD-ROM 3101 or the network.
　プログラムは、コンピュータ３０１に、上述した実施の形態の情報処理装置等の機能を実行させるオペレーティングシステム（ＯＳ）、またはサードパーティープログラム等は、必ずしも含まなくても良い。プログラムは、制御された態様で適切な機能（モジュール）を呼び出し、所望の結果が得られるようにする命令の部分のみを含んでいれば良い。コンピュータシステム３００がどのように動作するかは周知であり、詳細な説明は省略する。 The program does not necessarily include an operating system (OS) or a third-party program that causes the computer 301 to execute the functions of the information processing apparatus according to the above-described embodiment. The program only needs to include an instruction portion that calls an appropriate function (module) in a controlled manner and obtains a desired result. How the computer system 300 operates is well known and will not be described in detail.
　なお、上記プログラムにおいて、情報を送信するステップや、情報を受信するステップなどでは、ハードウェアによって行われる処理、例えば、送信ステップにおけるモデムやインターフェースカードなどで行われる処理（ハードウェアでしか行われない処理）は含まれない。 In the above program, in the step of transmitting information, the step of receiving information, etc., processing performed by hardware, for example, processing performed by a modem or an interface card in the transmission step (only performed by hardware) Processing) is not included.
　また、上記プログラムを実行するコンピュータは、単数であってもよく、複数であってもよい。すなわち、集中処理を行ってもよく、あるいは分散処理を行ってもよい。 Further, the computer that executes the program may be singular or plural. That is, centralized processing may be performed, or distributed processing may be performed.
　また、上記各実施の形態において、一の装置に存在する２以上の通信手段は、物理的に一の媒体で実現されても良いことは言うまでもない。 Further, in each of the above embodiments, it goes without saying that two or more communication means existing in one apparatus may be physically realized by one medium.
　また、上記各実施の形態において、各処理は、単一の装置によって集中処理されることによって実現されてもよく、あるいは、複数の装置によって分散処理されることによって実現されてもよい。 In each of the above embodiments, each process may be realized by centralized processing by a single device, or may be realized by distributed processing by a plurality of devices.
　本発明は、以上の実施の形態に限定されることなく、種々の変更が可能であり、それらも本発明の範囲内に包含されるものであることは言うまでもない。 The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications are possible, and it goes without saying that these are also included in the scope of the present invention.
　以上のように、本発明にかかる情報処理装置等は、出力中の番組を補助する番組補助情報を適切に出力できる、という効果を有し、テレビジョン装置等として有用である。 As described above, the information processing apparatus and the like according to the present invention have an effect of appropriately outputting program auxiliary information for assisting a program being output, and are useful as a television apparatus or the like.
　１　番組受信装置
　２、３、３２　情報処理装置
　３　情報処理システム
　１０　地図情報格納部
　１１　地点関連情報格納部
　１２　受付部
　１３　番組受信部
　１４　番組関連情報受信部
　１５　番組出力部
　１６　地点情報取得部
　１７　地点関連情報取得部
　１８　地点関連情報出力部
　２０　電子番組表格納部
　２１、３１　キー情報取得部
　２２　シーン判断部
　２３　番組種類取得部
　２４　移動手段情報取得部
　２５、３２　番組補助情報取得部
　２６　番組補助情報出力部
　３１　番組出力装置
　１７１　ストリートビュー取得手段
　１７２　地図情報取得手段
　１８１　ストリートビュー出力手段
　１８２　地図情報出力手段
　１８３　地点情報出力手段
　３１１　制御信号受信部
　３１２　制御部
　３２１　指示受付部
　３２２　制御信号送信部
　３２３　チャネル番号取得部 DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Program receiver 2, 3, 32 Information processing apparatus 3 Information processing system 10 Map information storage part 11 Point related information storage part 12 Reception part 13 Program reception part 14 Program related information reception part 15 Program output part 16 Point information acquisition part 17 Point-related information acquisition unit 18 Point-related information output unit 20 Electronic program guide storage unit 21, 31 Key information acquisition unit 22 Scene determination unit 23 Program type acquisition unit 24 Moving means information acquisition unit 25, 32 Program auxiliary information acquisition unit 26 Program auxiliary Information output unit 31 Program output device 171 Street view acquisition unit 172 Map information acquisition unit 181 Street view output unit 182 Map information output unit 183 Point information output unit 311 Control signal reception unit 312 Control unit 321 Instruction reception unit 322 Control signal transmission unit 323 Channel number acquisition unit

Claims (13)

  1. 番組を受信する番組受信部と、
    当該番組に関連する情報であり、１または２以上の地点情報を含む番組関連情報を受信する番組関連情報受信部と、
    前記番組受信部が受信した番組を出力する番組出力部と、
    前記番組関連情報受信部が受信した番組関連情報から１または２以上の地点情報を取得する地点情報取得部と、
    前記地点情報取得部が取得した地点情報に対応する情報であり、当該地点情報に関する情報である１または２種類以上の地点関連情報を取得する地点関連情報取得部と、
    前記地点関連情報取得部が取得した１または２種類以上の地点関連情報を、前記番組と共に出力する地点関連情報出力部とを具備する番組受信装置。     A program receiving unit for receiving a program;
    A program-related information receiving unit that receives program-related information that is information related to the program and includes one or more pieces of point information;
    A program output unit for outputting a program received by the program receiving unit;
    A spot information acquisition unit that acquires one or more spot information from the program related information received by the program related information reception unit;
    A point-related information acquisition unit that acquires one or more types of point-related information, which is information corresponding to the point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit and is information related to the point information;
    A program receiving apparatus comprising: a point-related information output unit that outputs one or more types of point-related information acquired by the point-related information acquisition unit together with the program.
  2. 前記地点関連情報取得部は、
    前記地点情報取得部が取得した２以上の地点情報を用いて、２以上の地点関連情報を連続して取得し、
    前記地点関連情報出力部は、
    前記地点関連情報取得部が連続して取得した２以上の地点関連情報を出力することにより、地点関連情報の動きを出力する請求項１記載の番組受信装置。     The point related information acquisition unit,
    Using the two or more point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit, continuously acquire two or more point related information,
    The point related information output unit
    The program receiving device according to claim 1, wherein movement of the spot related information is output by outputting two or more spot related information continuously acquired by the spot related information acquisition unit.
  3. 前記地点関連情報取得部は、
    前記地点情報取得部が取得した２以上の各地点情報の空間的な関係を示す空間的関係情報を取得し、当該空間的関係情報を用いて、２以上の地点関連情報を連続して取得し、
    かつ、取得した空間的関係情報に応じて、２以上の地点関連情報の取得方法が異なる請求項２記載の番組受信装置。     The point related information acquisition unit,
    Spatial relationship information indicating a spatial relationship between two or more pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit is acquired, and two or more point-related information is continuously acquired using the spatial relationship information. ,
    The program receiving apparatus according to claim 2, wherein two or more point-related information acquisition methods differ according to the acquired spatial relation information.
  4. 前記１または２種類以上の地点関連情報は、ストリートビューを含む請求項１から請求項３いずれか一項に記載の番組受信装置。 The program receiving device according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the one or more types of point-related information includes a street view.
  5. 前記地点関連情報取得部は、
    前記地点情報取得部が取得した２以上の地点情報を用いて、少なくとも一つの地点情報の位置を示す位置情報、および前記２以上の地点情報間の方角に関する方角情報を取得し、当該位置情報および当該方角情報を用いて、ストリートビューを取得する請求項４記載の番組受信装置。     The point related information acquisition unit,
    Using the two or more pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit, the position information indicating the position of at least one piece of point information and the direction information regarding the direction between the two or more pieces of point information are acquired, and the position information and The program receiving apparatus according to claim 4, wherein a street view is acquired using the direction information.
  6. 前記地点関連情報取得部は、
    前記位置情報を用いて、当該位置情報のカメラ映像を取得し、前記方角情報を用いて、取得したカメラ映像から当該方角情報が示す方角に対応するストリートビューを取得する請求項５記載の番組受信装置。     The point related information acquisition unit,
    The program reception according to claim 5, wherein a camera image of the position information is acquired using the position information, and a street view corresponding to the direction indicated by the direction information is acquired from the acquired camera image using the direction information. apparatus.
  7. 前記１または２種類以上の地点関連情報は、ストリートビューを含み、
    前記地点関連情報出力部は、
    前記空間的関係情報を用いて、前記２以上の地点情報が示す２以上の地点を移動する態様で、ストリートビューを出力する請求項３記載の番組受信装置。     The one or more types of point-related information includes street view,
    The point related information output unit
    The program receiving device according to claim 3, wherein street view is output in a manner in which two or more points indicated by the two or more point information are moved using the spatial relationship information.
  8. 前記１または２種類以上の地点関連情報は、地図情報を含む請求項１記載の番組受信装置。 The program receiving device according to claim 1, wherein the one or more types of point-related information includes map information.
  9. 前記地点関連情報取得部は、
    前記地点情報取得部が取得した２以上の各地点情報の空間的な関係を示す空間的関係情報を取得し、当該空間的関係情報に対応する地図情報を取得し、
    前記地点関連情報出力部は、
    前記空間的関係情報に応じて、異なる態様で地図情報を出力する請求項８記載の番組受信装置。     The point related information acquisition unit,
    Obtaining spatial relationship information indicating a spatial relationship between two or more pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit, acquiring map information corresponding to the spatial relationship information,
    The point related information output unit
    The program receiving apparatus according to claim 8, wherein map information is output in a different manner according to the spatial relation information.
  10. 前記地点関連情報出力部は、
    前記地点情報取得部が取得した２つの地点情報であり、第一の地点情報と当該第一の地点情報の後に受信された第二の地点情報との空間的関係情報に応じて、前記第一の地点情報に対応する地図情報を出力した後、前記第二の地点情報に対応する地図情報にズームインまたはズームアウトする態様で前記第二の地点情報を出力する請求項９記載の番組受信装置。     The point related information output unit
    The two pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit, according to the spatial relationship information between the first point information and the second point information received after the first point information, The program receiving device according to claim 9, wherein after the map information corresponding to the point information is output, the second point information is output in a manner in which the map information corresponding to the second point information is zoomed in or out.
  11. 前記地点関連情報出力部は、
    前記地点情報取得部が取得した２つの地点情報であり、第一の地点情報と当該第一の地点情報の後に受信された第二の地点情報との空間的関係情報に応じて、前記第一の地点情報が示す地点と前記第二の地点情報が示す地点とを含む地図情報を出力する請求項９記載の番組受信装置。     The point related information output unit
    The two pieces of point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit, according to the spatial relationship information between the first point information and the second point information received after the first point information, The program receiving device according to claim 9, wherein map information including a point indicated by the point information and a point indicated by the second point information is output.
  12. 番組受信部、番組関連情報受信部、番組出力部、地点情報取得部、地点関連情報取得部、および地点関連情報出力部により実現される番組受信方法であって、
    前記番組受信部が、番組を受信する番組受信ステップと、
    前記番組関連情報受信部が、当該番組に関連する情報であり、１または２以上の地点情報を含む番組関連情報を受信する番組関連情報受信ステップと、
    前記番組出力部が、前記番組受信ステップで受信された番組を出力する番組出力ステップと、
    前記地点情報取得部が、前記番組関連情報受信ステップで受信された番組関連情報から１または２以上の地点情報を取得する地点情報取得ステップと、
    前記地点関連情報取得部が、前記地点情報取得ステップで取得された地点情報に対応する情報であり、当該地点情報に関する情報である１または２種類以上の地点関連情報を取得する地点関連情報取得ステップと、
    前記地点関連情報出力部が、前記地点関連情報取得ステップで取得された１または２種類以上の地点関連情報を、前記番組と共に出力する地点関連情報出力ステップとを具備する番組受信方法。     A program receiving method realized by a program receiving unit, a program related information receiving unit, a program output unit, a point information acquiring unit, a point related information acquiring unit, and a point related information output unit,
    A program receiving step in which the program receiving unit receives a program;
    The program-related information receiving unit is a program-related information receiving step for receiving program-related information that is information related to the program and includes one or more pieces of spot information;
    The program output unit outputs the program received in the program receiving step,
    The point information acquisition step, wherein the point information acquisition unit acquires one or more point information from the program related information received in the program related information receiving step;
    The point-related information acquisition step in which the point-related information acquisition unit acquires one or more types of point-related information which is information corresponding to the point information acquired in the point information acquisition step and is information related to the point information. When,
    A program receiving method, wherein the spot related information output unit includes a spot related information output step of outputting one or more kinds of spot related information acquired in the spot related information acquisition step together with the program.
  13. コンピュータを、
    番組を受信する番組受信部と、
    当該番組に関連する情報であり、１または２以上の地点情報を含む番組関連情報を受信する番組関連情報受信部と、
    前記番組受信部が受信した番組を出力する番組出力部と、
    前記番組関連情報受信部が受信した番組関連情報から１または２以上の地点情報を取得する地点情報取得部と、
    前記地点情報取得部が取得した地点情報に対応する情報であり、当該地点情報に関する情報である１または２種類以上の地点関連情報を取得する地点関連情報取得部と、
    前記地点関連情報取得部が取得した１または２種類以上の地点関連情報を、前記番組と共に出力する地点関連情報出力部として機能させるためのプログラムを記録した記録媒体。     Computer
    A program receiving unit for receiving a program;
    A program-related information receiving unit that receives program-related information that is information related to the program and includes one or more pieces of point information;
    A program output unit for outputting a program received by the program receiving unit;
    A spot information acquisition unit that acquires one or more spot information from the program related information received by the program related information reception unit;
    A point-related information acquisition unit that acquires one or more types of point-related information, which is information corresponding to the point information acquired by the point information acquisition unit and is information related to the point information;
    The recording medium which recorded the program for functioning as a point related information output part which outputs the 1 or 2 or more types of point related information which the said point related information acquisition part acquired with the said program.
PCT/JP2014/083367 2014-01-15 2014-12-17 Program reception apparatus, program reception method, and recording medium WO2015107827A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2014005252 2014-01-15
JP2014-005252 2014-01-15
JP2014151618A JP6415157B2 (en) 2014-01-15 2014-07-25 Program receiving apparatus and information processing apparatus
JP2014-151618 2014-07-25

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2015107827A1 true WO2015107827A1 (en) 2015-07-23

Family

ID=53542729

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2014/083367 WO2015107827A1 (en) 2014-01-15 2014-12-17 Program reception apparatus, program reception method, and recording medium

Country Status (2)

Country Link
JP (1) JP6415157B2 (en)
WO (1) WO2015107827A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2020135709A (en) * 2019-02-25 2020-08-31 株式会社ゼロイン Sightseeing information provision device, and program
JP7246290B2 (en) * 2019-09-26 2023-03-27 シャープ株式会社 Information processing device and information processing method

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH07318357A (en) * 1994-05-23 1995-12-08 Sumitomo Electric Ind Ltd Map display method in navigation apparatus
JP2011039130A (en) * 2009-08-07 2011-02-24 Hyogo Prefecture Linked display device, linked display method, and program
JP2012039609A (en) * 2011-08-02 2012-02-23 United Video Properties Inc Electronic program guide for mobile navigation device, destination information providing method and apparatus
JP2012168069A (en) * 2011-02-16 2012-09-06 Mic Ware:Kk Map information processor, navigation device, map information processing method and program

Family Cites Families (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2008295001A (en) * 2007-05-23 2008-12-04 Toru Nishioka Television broadcast system capable of displaying map
JP2011055343A (en) * 2009-09-03 2011-03-17 Sharp Corp Content playback apparatus, program, and recording medium
JP4892601B2 (en) * 2009-10-30 2012-03-07 株式会社ソニー・コンピュータエンタテインメント Information processing apparatus, tuner, and information processing method
JP5352711B2 (en) * 2011-09-28 2013-11-27 日立コンシューマエレクトロニクス株式会社 Portable terminal, system, information processing method and program
JP6083536B2 (en) * 2012-02-24 2017-02-22 パナソニックＩｐマネジメント株式会社 Information display device

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH07318357A (en) * 1994-05-23 1995-12-08 Sumitomo Electric Ind Ltd Map display method in navigation apparatus
JP2011039130A (en) * 2009-08-07 2011-02-24 Hyogo Prefecture Linked display device, linked display method, and program
JP2012168069A (en) * 2011-02-16 2012-09-06 Mic Ware:Kk Map information processor, navigation device, map information processing method and program
JP2012039609A (en) * 2011-08-02 2012-02-23 United Video Properties Inc Electronic program guide for mobile navigation device, destination information providing method and apparatus

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2015156630A (en) 2015-08-27
JP6415157B2 (en) 2018-10-31

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP5908125B2 (en) Movement support apparatus and movement support method
CN108139227B (en) Location-based service tool for video illustration, selection and synchronization
US20040210382A1 (en) Information terminal apparatus, navigation system, information processing method, and computer program
CN102566895B (en) Electronic device and method for providing menu using the same
US20100049704A1 (en) Map information processing apparatus, navigation system, and map information processing method
US20150116358A1 (en) Apparatus and method for processing metadata in augmented reality system
EP1612516A1 (en) Output control device, method thereof, program thereof, and recording medium storing the program
JP2007178212A (en) Facility retrieval apparatus and facility retrieval method
JP2004101248A (en) Contents providing system for mover
JP6415157B2 (en) Program receiving apparatus and information processing apparatus
CN101689207B (en) Providing access to a collection of content items
JP2010146151A (en) Road side device, in-vehicle unit, and road vehicle communication system, method and program
JP2005294962A (en) Broadcast receiver, program guide display method, and program guide display program
JP2009205504A (en) Guide system, server system, guide method and program
US8280627B2 (en) Map information processing apparatus, navigation system, and program
JP5912918B2 (en) In-vehicle device, information output method, and program
JP2006013619A (en) Data processor, method thereof, program thereof, and recording medium with the program recorded
JP2006053005A (en) Traffic information providing system and map display terminal
JP2011179977A (en) Navigation device, navigation method, and navigation program
JP2009258014A (en) Route guidance system, route guidance device, route guidance method, and route guidance program
JP2009174970A (en) Image output device, data generating device, navigation system, and data structure of point data
JP2010011266A (en) Data broadcast reception device and portable apparatus
WO2008041317A1 (en) Spot information providing device, spot information retrieving device, spot information retrieving method, spot information retrieving program, and recording medium
JP2008160447A (en) Broadcast program receiving device, broadcast program reception planning device, broadcast program receiving method, broadcast program reception planning method, program, and recording medium
JP6723760B2 (en) Navigation device, navigation method and program

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 14878905

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 14878905

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1